Marantz SR7001, SR8001 user guide

Download

Model SR7001/SR8001 User Guide

AV Surround Receiver

ENGLISH

NEDERLANDS

ITALIANO

WARRANTY

For warranty information, contact your local Marantz distributor.

RETAIN YOUR PURCHASE RECEIPT

Your purchase receipt is your permanent record of a valuable purchase. It should be kept in a safe place to be referred to as necessary for insurance purposes or when corresponding with Marantz.

IMPORTANT

When seeking warranty service, it is the responsibility of the consumer to establish proof and date of purchase. Your purchase receipt or invoice is adequate for such proof.

FOR U.K. ONLY

This undertaking is in addition to a consumer's statutory rights and does not affect those rights in any way.

FRANÇAIS

GARANTIE

Pour des informations sur la garantie, contacter le distributeur local Marantz.

CONSERVER L'ATTESTATION D'ACHAT

L'attestation d'achat est la preuve permanente d'un achat de valeur. La conserver en lieu sur pour s'y reporter aux ﬁ ns d'obtention d'une couverture d'assurance ou dans le cadre de correspondances avec Marantz.

IMPORTANT

Pour l'obtention d'un service couvert par la garantie, il incombe au client d'établir la preuve de l'achat et d'en corroborer la date. Le reçu ou la facture constituent des preuves sufﬁ santes.

DEUTSCH

GARANTIE

Voor inlichtingen omtrent garantie dient u zich tot uw plaatselijke Marantz.

UW KWITANTIE, KASSABON E.D. BEWAREN

Uw kwitantie, kassabon e.d. vormen uw bewijs van aankoop van een waardevol artikel en dienen op een veilige plaats bewaard te worden voor evt, verwijzing bijv, in verbend met verzekering of bij correspondentie met Marantz.

BELANGRIJK

Bij een evt, beroep op de garantie is het de verantwoordelijkheid van de consument een gedateerd bewijs van aankoop te tonen. Uw kassabon of factuurzijn voldoende bewijs.

ESPAÑOL

GARANTIA

Para obtener información acerca de la garantia póngase en contacto con su distribuidor Marantz.

GUARDE SU RECIBO DE COMPRA

Su recibo de compra es su prueba permanente de haber adquirido un aparato de valor, Este recibo deberá guardarlo en un lugar seguro y utilizarlo como referencia cuando tenga que hacer uso del seguro o se ponga en contacto con Marantz.

IMPORTANTE

Cuando solicite el servicio otorgado por la garantia el usuario tiene la responsabilidad de demonstrar cuándo efectuó la compra. En este caso, su recibo de compra será la prueba apropiada.

GARANZIA

L’apparecchio è coperto da una garanzia di buon funzionamento della durata di un anno, o del periodo previsto dalla legge, a partire dalla data di acquisto comprovata da un documento attestante il nominativo del Rivenditore e la data di vendita. La garanzia sarà prestata con la sostituzione o la riparazione gratuita delle parti difettose. Non sono coperti da garanzia difetti derivanti da uso improprio, errata installazione, manutenzione effettuata da personale non autorizzato o, comunque, da circostanze che non possano riferirsi a difetti di funzionamento dell’apparecchio. Sono inoltre esclusi dalla garanzia gli interventi inerenti l’installazione e l’allacciamento agli impianti di alimentazione. Gli apparecchi verranno riparati presso i nostri Centri di Assistenza Autorizzati. Le spese ed i rischi di trasporto sono a carico del cliente. La casa costruttrice declina ogni responsabilità per danni diretti o indiretti provocati dalla inosservanza delle prescrizioni di installazione, uso e manutenzione dettagliate nel presente manuale o per guasti dovuti ad uso continuato a ﬁ ni professionali.

SVENSKA

GARANTI

För information om garantin, kontakta Marantz lokalagent.

SPAR KVITTOT

Kvittot är ett inköpsbevis på en värdefull vara. Det skall förvaras säkert och hänvisas till vid försäkringsfall eller vidkorrespondens mod Marantz.

VIKTIGT

Fö att garantin skall gälla är det kundens sak att framställa bevis och datum om köpet. Kvitto eller faktura är tillräokligt bevis fö detta.

GARANTIE

Bei Garantiefragen wenden Sie sich bitte an Ihren Marantz-Händler.

HEBEN SIE IHRE QUITTING GUT AUF

Die Quittung dient Ihnen als bleibende Unterlage für Ihren wertvollen Einkauf Das Aufbewahren der Quittung ist wichtig, da die darin enthaltenen Angaben für Versicherungswecke oder bei Korrespondenz mit Marantz angeführt werden müssen.

WICHTIG!

Bei Garantiefragen muß der Kunde eine Kaufunterlage mit Kaufdatum vorlegen. Ihren Quittung oder Rechnung ist als Unterlage ausreichend.

English

The SR7001/SR8001 is in conformity with the EMC directive and low-voltage directive.

Deutsch

Français

Le SR7001/SR8001 est conforme à la directive EMC et à la directive sur les basses tensions.

Das Modell SR7001/SR8001 entspricht den EMC-Richtlinien und den Richtlinien für Niederspannungsgeräte.

Nederlands

De SR7001/SR8001 voldoet aan de EMC eisen en de vereisten voor laag-voltage.

Español

El SR7001/SR8001 está de acuerdo con las normas EMC y las relacionadas con baja tensión.

Italiano

Il SR7001/SR8001 è conforme alle direttive CEE ed a quelle per i bassi voltaggi.

Svenska

SR7001/SR8001 är tillverkad i enlighet med EMC direktiven och direktiven för lågvoltsutrusning.

CE MARKING

English

- Do not expose the equipment to rain or moisture.

- Do not remove the cover from the equipment.

- Do not insert anything into the equipment through the ventilation holes.

- Do not handle the mains cord with wet hands.

- Do not cover the ventilation with any items such as tablecloths, newspapers, curtains, etc.

- No naked ﬂ ame sources, such as lighted candles, should be placed on the equipment.

- When disposing of used batteries, please comply with governmental regulations or environmental public instruction’s rules that apply in your country or area.

- Make a space of about 0.2 meter around the unit.

- No objects ﬁ lled with liquids, such as vases, shall be placed on the equipment.

- When the switch is in the OFF position, the equipment is not completely switched off from MAINS.

- The equipment shall be installed near the power supply so that the power supply is easily accessible.

- Do Not Touch Hot Spots During and Immediately After Use.

- During and immediately after use, this product is hot in areas other than the controls and rear panel connection jacks. Do not touch hot spots and especially the top panel. Contact with hot areas can cause burns.

Français

Ne pas exposer l’appareil à la pluie ni à l’humidité.

- Ne pas essayer de retirer le boîtier de l’appareil.

- Ne rien insérer dans l’appareil par les oriﬁ ces de ventilation.

- Ne pas manipuler le cordon d’alimentation avec les mains mouillées.

- Ne pas recouvrir les ouïes de ventilation avec un objet quelconque comme une nappe, un journal, un rideau, etc.

- Ne placer aucune source de ﬂ amme nue, comme une bougie allumée, sur l'appareil.

- Pour mettre au rebut les piles usées, respecter les lois gouvernementales ou les règlements ofﬁ ciels concernant l’environnement qui s'appliquent à votre pays ou région.

- Veiller à ce qu’aucun objet ne soit à moins de 0,2 mètre des côtés de l'appareil.

WARNINGS

AVERTISSEMENTS

- Aucun objet rempli de liquide, un vase par exemple, ne doit être placé sur l'appareil.

- Lorsque l'interrupteur est sur la position OFF, l'appareil n'est pas complètement déconnecté du SECTEUR (MAINS).

- L'appareil sera installé près de la source d'alimentation, de sorte que cette dernière soit facilement accessible.

- Ne pas toucher aux zones chaudes pendant et immédiatement après l’utilisation.

- Pendant l’utilisation et immediatement apres, cet appareil est chaud en dehors des commandes et des prises de raccordement arriere. Ne pas toucher aux zones chaudes, et particulièrement au panneau supérieur, pour éviter tout risque de brûlure.

Deutsch

WARNHINWEISE

- Das Gerät nicht Regen oder Feuchtigkeit aussetzen.

- Die Abdeckung nicht vom Gerät abnehmen.

- Keine Gegenstände durch die Belüftungsschlitze stecken.

- Das Netzkabel nicht mit feuchten oder nassen Händen anfassen.

- Decken Sie die Lüftungsöffnungen nicht mit einem Tischtuch, einer Zeitung, einem Vorhang usw. ab.

- Es dürfen keine Gegenstände mit offener Flamme, wie etwa brennende Kerzen, auf dem Gerät aufgestellt werden.

- Beachten Sie bei der Entsorgung der verbrauchten Batterien alle geltenden lokalen und überregionalen Regelungen.

- Auf allen Geräteseiten muß ein Zwischenraum von ungefähr 0,2 meter vorhanden sein.

- Auf das Gerät dürfen keine mit Flüssigkeiten gefüllte Behälter, wie etwa eine Vase, gestellt werden.

- Wenn der Schalter ausgeschaltet ist (OFFPosition), ist das Gerät nicht vollständig vom Stromnetz (MAINS) abgetrennt.

- Das Gerät sollte in der Nähe einer Netzsteckdose aufgestellt werden, damit es leicht an das Stromnetz angeschlossen werden kann.

- Berühren Sie während oder unmittelbar nach dem Gebrauch keine heißen Stellen des Gerätes.

- Während oder unmittelbar nach dem Gebrauch ist dieses Produkt mit Ausnahme der Bedienelemente und der Anschlussbuchsen auf der Rückseite heiß. Berühren Sie die heißen Stellen und insbesondere die Oberseite nicht. Der Kontakt mit heißen Flächen kann zu Verbrennungen führen.

Nederlands

WAARSCHUWINGEN

- Stel het apparaat niet bloot aan regen of vocht.

- Verwijder de afdekplaat van het apparaat niet.

- Duw niets door de ventilatieopeningen in het apparaat.

- Raak het netsnoer niet met natte handen aan.

- Bedek de ventilatieopeningen niet met enige voorwerpen, zoals tafelkleden, kranten, gordijnen, enz.

- Plaats geen brandende voorwerpen, zoals kaarsen, op het apparaat.

- Volg bij het weggooien van verbruikte batterijen de overheidswetgeving of milieuvoorschriften op die van kracht zijn in het land of de regio waarin u zich bevindt.

- Zorg dat er 0,2 meter vrije ruimte rond het toestel is.

- Plaats geen voorwerpen met een vloeistof erin, zoals een bloemenvaas, op het apparaat.

- Als de schakelaar op OFF staat, is het apparaat niet volledig losgekoppeld van de netspanning (MAINS).

- De apparatuur wordt in de buurt van het stopcontact geïnstalleerd, zodat dit altijd gemakkelijk toegankelijk is.

- Raak hete gedeelten van het apparaat niet aan tijdens en onmiddellijk na het gebruik.

- Tijdens en onmiddellijk na het gebruik is dit product heet, behalve in de omgeving van de bedieningstoetsen en de aansluitingen op het achterpaneel. Raak geen hete plekken aan, vooral niet het bovenpaneel. Contact met hete plekken kan brandwonden veroorzaken.

Español

ADVERTENCIAS

- No exponga el equipo a la lluvia ni a la humedad.

- No extraiga la tapa del equipo.

- No introduzca nada en el interior del equipo a través de los oriﬁ cios de ventilación.

- No maneje el cable de alimentación con las manos mojadas.

- No cubra la ventilación con objetos como manteles, periódicos, cortinas, etc.

- No deben colocarse sobre el equipo elementos con fuego, por ejemplo velas encendidas.

- Cuando se eliminen baterías usadas, deben cumplirse las reglamentaciones oficiales o las normas de protección medioambiental aplicables en su país o en su zona.

- Deje un espacio de unos 0,2 metro alrededor de la unidad.

- No se deben colocar sobre el aparato recipientes que contengan líquidos, como por ejemplo jarrones.

- Cuando el interruptor está en la posición OFF, el equipo no está completamente desconectado de la alimentación MAINS.

- El equipo se instalará cerca de la fuente de alimentación de manera que resulte fácil acceder a ella.

- No tocar las áreas calientes mientras la unidad está en uso ni inmediatamente después.

- Mientras esta en funcionamiento e inmediatamente despues de su uso, este producto presenta zonas calientes en diversas partes, no exclusivamente en el sector de los controles o en las conexiones del panel posterior. No tocar las áreas calientes, especialmente el panel superior dado que pueden producirse quemaduras.

Italiano

AVVERTENZE

- Non esporre l’apparecchio alla pioggia o all’umidità.

- Non rimuovere il coperchio dell’apparecchio.

- Non introdurre oggetti all’interno dell’apparecchio attraverso i fori di ventilazione.

- Non toccare il cavo di alimentazione con le mani bagnate.

- Non coprire le fessure di ventilazione con tovaglie, giornali, tende od oggetti analoghi.

- Non posare sull'apparecchio sorgenti di ﬁ amme scoperte quali candele accese.

- Smaltire le pile usate in conformità alle norme governative o disposizioni ambientali vigenti nel proprio paese o zona.

- Lasciare 0,2 metro liberi tutto intorno l'unità.

- Non mettere sull'apparecchiatura alcun contenitore di liquido, come ad esempio dei vasi.

- Quando l'interruttore è nella posizione OFF, l'apparecchiatura non è completamente scollegata da MAINS.

- L’apparecchio va installato in prossimità della fonte di alimentazione, in modo che quest’ultima sia facilmente accessibile.

- Non toccare i punti caldi né durante, né immediatamente dopo l’uso.

- Durante, e subito dopo l’utilizzo, questo prodotto risulta essere molto caldo in alcune sue parti come ad esempio i connettori del pannello posteriore. Non toccare i punti caldi e specialmente la superﬁ cie del pannello. Il contatto con parti calde può provocare ustioni.

Svenska

VARNINGAR

- Utsätt inte utrustningen för regn eller fukt.

- Ta inte bort utrustningens hölje.

- För inte in föremål i utrustningen genom ventilationshålen.

- Hantera inte nätsladden med våta händer.

- Täck inte för ventilationsöppningarna med några föremål som till exempel bordsdukar, dagstidningar, gardiner e.d.

- Inga föremål med öppen låga, som till exempel tända stearinljus, bör placeras på utrustningen.

- Följ de lagar och miljöskyddsråd som gäller i det land eller område där du bor när du gör dig av med batterier.

- Se till att det ﬁ nns omkring 0,2 meter fri plats runt omkring enheten.

- Inga objekt som är fyllda med någon vätska, till exempel blomstervaser, bör placeras på apparaten.

- Även om strömbrytaren står i det avstängda läget OFF, så är utrustningen inte helt bortkopplad från det elektriska nätet (MAINS).

- Utrustningen ska vara installerad nära strömuttaget så att strömförsörjningen är lätt att tillgå.

- Vidrör inte varma punkter under och omedelbart efter användning.

- Bortsett från kontrollerna och anslutningsuttagen på baksidan är den här produkten varm under och omedelbart efter användning. Vidrör inte varma punkter och särskilt inte ovansidan. Kontakt med varma ytor kan orsaka brännskador.

TABLE OF CONTENTS

FOREWORD ...........................................2

EQUIPMENT MAINS WORKING SETTING ......................2

INTRODUCTION ....................................2

A NOTE ABOUT RECYCLING ..............2

DESCRIPTION .......................................2

FEATURES .............................................5

ACCESSORIES ......................................5

FRONT PANEL ......................................6

FL DISPLAY AND INDICATER ...........................................7

REAR PANEL .........................................8

REMOTE CONTROLLER RC8001SR ...9

NAMES AND FUNCTIONS ................................................9

LCD INDICATORS ............................................................10

REMOTE CONTROL RANGE .........................................11

LOADING BATTERIES .....................................................11

BATTERY REPLACEMENT INTERVAL ...........................11

SETTING THE TIME ........................................................11

GENERAL INFORMATION OF

RC8001SR TO SR7001 ...................................................12

CONNECTIONS ...................................13

SPEAKER PLACEMENT .................................................13

CONNECTING SPEAKERS .............................................13

CONNECTING AUDIO COMPONENTS ..........................14

CONNECTING VIDEO COMPONENTS ..........................16

ADVANCED CONNECTING ............................................17

CONNECTING THE REMOTE CONTROL JACKS .........17

CONNECTING THE ANTENNA TERMINALS .................18

CONNECTING FOR THE MULTI ROOM ........................19

CONNECTING OTHER EQUIPMENT .............................20

SETUP ..................................................21

ONSCREEN DISPLAY MENU SYSTEM .........................21

1 INPUT SETUP .............................................................23

2 SPKR (SPEAKER) SETUP ..........................................26

3 SURROUND SETUP ...................................................32

4 VIDEO SETUP .............................................................34

5 PREFERENCE ............................................................35

6 ACOUSTIC EQ ............................................................37

BASIC OPERATION (PLAY BACK) .....39

SELECTING AN INPUT SOURCE ...................................39

SELECTING THE SURROUND MODE ...........................39

ADJUSTING THE MAIN VOLUME ..................................39

NIGHT MODE ...................................................................39

ADJUSTING THE TONE (BASS & TREBLE)

CONTROL ........................................................................39

DIALOGUE NORMALIZATION MESSAGE .....................39

VIDEO CONVERT ............................................................40

I/P CONVERT ...................................................................40

TEMPORARILY TURNING OFF THE SOUND .................40

USING THE SLEEP TIMER .............................................40

SURROUND MODE .............................41

SURROUND .....................................................................41

SOURCE DIRECT ...........................................................41

PURE DIRECT ................................................................41

OTHER FUNCTION ..............................45

TV AUTO ON/OFF FUNCTION ........................................45

ATTENUATION TO ANALOG INPUT SIGNAL ................45

LISTENING THROUGH HEADPHONES .......................45

DOLBY HEADPHONE MODE .........................................45

VIDEO ON/OFF ................................................................45

SELECTING ANALOG AUDIO INPUT OR

DIGITAL AUDIO INPUT ................................................... 46

RECORDING AN ANALOG SOURCE .............................46

DISPLAY MODE ...............................................................46

SPEAKER A/B ..................................................................47

7.1 CH INPUT ...................................................................47

AUX2 INPUT .....................................................................47

LIP.SYNC ..........................................................................47

BASIC OPERATION (TUNER) .............48

LISTENING TO THE TUNER ...........................................48

PRESET MEMORY ..........................................................49

RDS OPERATION ............................................................51

MULTI ROOM SYSTEM .......................52

MULTI ROOM PLAYBACK USING THE MULTI ROOM

OUT TERMINALS .............................................................52

MULTI ROOM PLAYBACK USING THE

MULTI SPEAKER TERMINALS .......................................52

OPERATION OF THE MULTI ROOM OUTPUTS WITH

THE REMOTE CONTROL FROM MULTI A .....................53

REMOTE CONTROLLER

OPERATION ....................................54

CONTROLLING MARANTZ COMPONENTS .................54

BASIC OPERATION .........................................................56

PROGRAMMING MACROS ............................................59

CLONE MODE ..................................................................61

SETUP ..............................................................................62

TROUBLESHOOTING .........................63

HDMI .................................................................................64

TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS ..........65

DIMENSIONS ......................................65

SETUP CODES .......................................I

DIRECT BUTTON FUNCTIONS .......... VI

ENGLISH

FOREWORD

This section must be read before any connection is made to the mains supply.

EQUIPMENT MAINS WORKING SETTING

Your Marantz product has been prepared to comply with the household power and safety requirements that exist in your area. SR7001/SR8001 can be powered by 230V AC only.

Recording and playback of any material may require consent. For further information refer to the following:

— Copyright Act 1956 — Dramatic and Musical Performers Act 1958 — Performers Protection Acts 1963 and 1972 — Any subsequent statutory enactments and

orders

CAUTIONS ON INSTALLATION

For heat dispersal, leave at least 0.2 m/8 inch of space between the top, back and sides of this unit and the wall or other components.

• Do not obstruct the ventilation holes.

Above

0.2 m (8 inchs)

Left

0.2 m (8 inchs) or more

INPUT SELECTOR

STANDBY

POWER ON/STANDBY

AV SURROUND RECEIVER SR8001

or more

VOLUME

PURE DIRECT

SURROUND

V-OFFDISPMULTI AUTO TUNED STSPKR A B

PEAK ANALOG

ATT

DIGITAL

SURRDIRECT

NIGHT

SLEEP

DISC 6.1 MTX 6.1 EQ

AUTO

LCR

LFE

AAC

PCM

SLS SR

DSD

SURROUND

MULTI

MODE AUTO

MEMORY CLEAR

BAND

SPEAKER

MULTI

T-MODE

7.1CH INPUT

DISPLAY

SPEAKERS

PURE DIRECT THX

A/B

MultEQ

ENTER

EXIT

PHONES

MIC

DOWN

DIGITAL

AUX 1 INPUT

S-VIDEO

0.2 m (8 inchs)

RLVIDEO

AUDIO

0.2 m (8 inchs)

Right

or more

Rear

or more

INTRODUCTION

Thank you for purchasing the Marantz SR7001/ SR8001 Surround receiver. This remarkable component has been engineered to provide you with many years of home theater enjoyment. Please take a few minutes to read this manual thoroughly before you connect and operate the SR7001/SR8001. As there are a number of connection and conﬁ guration options, you are encouraged to discuss your own particular home theater setup with your Marantz A/V specialist dealer.

This user guide covers the SR7001 and SR8001, though the SR7001 is given for the title. Explanations of features belonging only to the SR8001 are indicated as “SR8001 only”.

A NOTE ABOUT RECYCLING

This product’s packaging materials are recyclable and can be reused. This product and the accessories packed together are the applicable product to the WEEE directive except batteries. Please dispose of any materials in accordance with your local recycling regulations. When discarding the unit, comply with your local rules or regulations. Batteries should never be thrown away or incinerated but disposed of in accordance with your local regulations concerning chemical wastes.

DESCRIPTION

THX® is an exclusive set of standards and technologies established by the world-renowned ﬁ lm production company, Lucasﬁ lm Ltd. THX resulted from George Lucas’ desire to reproduce the movie soundtrack as faithfully as possible both in the movie theater and in the home theater. THX engineers developed patented technologies to accurately translate the sound from a movie theater environment into the home, correcting the tonal and spatial errors that occur. When the THX mode of the SR7001 is on, three distinct THX technologies are automatically added: Re-Equalization-restores the correct tonal balance for watching a movie in a home environment. These sounds are otherwise mixed to be brighter for a large movie theater. Re-EQ compensates for this and prevents the soundtracks from being overly bright and harsh when played in a home theater. Timbre Matching-ﬁ lters the information going to the surround speakers so they more closely match the tonal characteristics of the sound coming from the front speakers. This ensures seamless panning between the front and surround speakers. Adaptive Decorrelation-slightly changes one surround channel’s time and phase relationship with respect to the other surround channel. This expands the listening position and creates with only two surround speakers the same spacious surround experience as in a movie theater with multiple surround speakers. The Marantz SR7001 was required to pass a rigorous series of quality and performance tests, in addition to incorporating the technologies explained above, in order to be THX certiﬁ ed by Lucasﬁ lm Ltd. THX requirements cover every aspect of performance including pre-amplifier and power amplifier performance and operation, and hundreds of other parameters in both the digital and analog domain. Movies which have been encoded in Dolby Digital, DTS, Dolby Pro Logic, stereo and Mono will all beneﬁ t from the THX mode when being viewed. The THX mode should only be activated when watching movies which were originally produced for a movie theater environment.

THX need not be activated for music, movies made especially for TV, or shows such as sports programming, talk shows, etc. This is because they were originally mixed for a small room environment.

THX and Select 2 are trademarks of THX Ltd. THX may be registered in some jurisdictions. Surround EX is a trademark of Dolby Laboratories. Used with permission.

THX Surround EX—Dolby DIgital Surround EX is a joint development of Dolby Laboratories and THX Ltd.

In a movie theater, ﬁ lm soundtracks that have been encoded with Dolby Digital Surround EX technology are able to reproduce an extra channel which has been added during the mixing of the program. This channel, called Surround Back, places sounds behind the listener in addition to the currently available front left, front center, front right, surround right, surround left and subwoofer channels. This additional channel provides the opportunity for more detailed imaging behind the listener and brings more depth, spacious ambience and sound localization than ever before. Movies that were created using the Dolby Digital Surround EX technology, when released into the home consumer market may exhibit wording to that effect on the packaging. A list of movies created using this technology can be found on the Dolby web site at www.dolby.com. A list of available DVD software titles encoded with this technology an be found at www.thx.com. Only receiver and controller products bearing the THX Surround EX logo, when in the THX Surround EX mode, faithfully reproduce this new technology in the home. This product may also engage the THX Surround EX mode during the playback of 5.1 channel material that is not Dolby Digital Surround EX eocnded. In such case, the information delivered to the Surround Back channel will be program dependent and may or may not be very pleasing depending on the particular soundtrack and the tastes of the individual listener.

“SURROUND EX™” is a trademark of Dolby Laboratories. Used under authorization.

THX Select2

Before any home theater component can be THX Select2 certiﬁ ed, it must pass a rigorous series of quality and performance tests. Only then can a product feature the THX Select2 logo, which is your guarantee that the Home Theater products you purchase will give you superb performance for many years to come. THX Select2 requirements deﬁ ne hundreds of parameters, including power ampliﬁ er performance, and pre-ampliﬁ er performance and operation for both digital and analog domains. THX Select2 receivers also feature proprietary THX technologies (e.g., THX Mode) which accurately translate movie soundtracks for home theater playback.

DTS was introduced in 1994 to provide 5.1 channels of discrete digital audio into home theater systems. DTS brings you premium quality discrete multichannel digital sound to both movies and music. DTS is a multichannel sound system designed to create full range digital sound reproduction. The no compromise DTS digital process sets the standard of quality for cinema sound by delivering an exact copy of the studio master recordings to neighborhood and home theaters. Now, every moviegoer can hear the sound exactly as the moviemaker intended. DTS can be enjoyed in the home for either movies or music on of DVD’s, LD’s, and CD’s.

“DTS” and “DTS Digital Surround” are registered trademarks of Digital Theater Systems, Inc.

The advantages of discrete multichannel systems over matrix are well known. But even in homes equipped for discrete multichannel, there remains a need for high-quality matrix decoding. This is because of the large library of matrix surround motion pictures available on disc and on VHS tape; and analog television broadcasts. The typical matrix decoder of today derives a center channel and a mono surround channel from twochannel matrix stereo material. It is better than a simple matrix in that it includes steering logic to improve separation, but because of its mono, bandlimited surround it can be disappointing to users accustomed to discrete multichannel.

Neo:6 offers several important improvements as follow,

• Neo:6 provides up to six full-band channels of matrix decoding from stereo matrix material. Users with 6.1 and 5.1 systems will derive six and ﬁ ve separate channels, respectively, corresponding to the standard home-theater speaker layouts.

• Neo:6 technology allows various sound elements within a channel or channels to be steered separately, and in a way which follows naturally from the original presentation.

• Neo:6 offers a music mode to expand stereo nonmatrix recordings into the ﬁ ve- or six-channel layout, in a way which does not diminish the subtlety and integrity of the original stereo recording.

DTS-ES Extended Surround is a new multichannel digital signal format developed by Digital Theater Systems Inc. While offering high compatibility with the conventional DTS Digital Surround format, DTSES Extended Surround greatly improves the 360degree surround impression and space expression thanks to further expanded surround signals. This format has been used professionally in movie theaters since 1999. In addition to the 5.1 surround channels (FL, FR, C, SL, SR and LFE), DTS-ES Extended Surround also offers the SB (Surround Back) channel for surround playback with a total of 6.1 channels. DTS-ES Extended Surround includes two signal formats with different surround signal recording methods, as DTSES Discrete 6.1 and DTS-ES Matrix 6.1.

“DTS”, “DTS-ES and “Neo:6” are trademarks of Digital Theater Systems, Inc.

The stereo CD is a 16-bit medium with sampling at

44.1 kHz. Professional audio has been 20- or 24-

bit for some time, and there is increasing interest in higher sampling rates both for recording and for delivery into the home. Greater bit depths provide extended dynamic range. Higher sampling rates allow wider frequency response and the use of antialias and reconstruction ﬁ lters with more favorable aural characteristics.

DTS 96/24 allows for 5.1channel sound tracks to be encoded at a rate of 96kHz/24bits on DVD-Video titles. When DVD-video appeared, it became possible to deliver 24-bit, 96 kHz audio into the home, but only in two channels, and with serious limitations on picture. This capability has had little use. DVD-audio allows 96/24 in six channels, but a new player is needed, and only analog outputs are provided, necessitating the use of the D/A converters and analog electronics provided in the player.

DTS 96/24 offers the following:

1. Sound quality transparent to the original 96/24 master.

2. Full backward compatibility with all existing decoders. (Existing decoders will output a 48 kHz signal)

3. No new player required: DTS 96/24 can be carried on DVD-video, or in the video zone of DVD-audio, accessible to all DVD players.

4. 96/24 5.1-channel sound with full-quality fullmotion video, for music programs and motion picture soundtracks on DVD-video.

“DTS” and “DTS 96/24” are trademarks of Digital Theater Systems, Inc.

Dolby Digital identiﬁ es the use of Dolby Digital audio coding for such consumer formats as DVD and DTV. As with ﬁ lm sound, Dolby Digital can provide up to ﬁ ve full-range channels for left, center, and right screen channels, independent left and right surround channels, and a sixth (“.1”) channel for low-frequency effects.

Dolby Surround Pro Logic II is an improved matrix decoding technology that provides better spatiality and directionality on Dolby Surround program material; provides a convincing three-dimensional soundﬁ eld on conventional stereo music recordings; and is ideally suited to bring the surround experience to automotive sound. While conventional surround programming is fully compatible with Dolby Surround Pro Logic II decoders, soundtracks will be able to be encoded speciﬁ cally to take full advantage of Pro Logic II playback, including separate left and right surround channels. (Such material is also compatible with conventional Pro Logic decoders.)

Dolby Digital EX creates six full-bandwidth output channels from 5.1-channel sources. This is done using a matrix decoder that derives three surround channels from the two in the original recording. For best results, Dolby Digital EX should be used with movies soundtracks recorded with Dolby Digital Surround EX.

About Dolby Pro Logic IIx

Dolby Pro Logic II x technology delivers a natural and immersing 7.1-channel listening experience to the home theater environment. A product of Dolby's expertise in surround sound and matrix decoding technologies, Dolby Pro Logic II x is a complete surround sound solution that maximizes the entertainment experience from stereo as well as

5.1-channel encoded sources.

Dolby Pro Logic II x is fully compatible with Dolby Surround Pro Logic technology and can optimally decode the thousands of commercially available Dolby Surround encoded video cassettes and television programs with enhanced depth and spatiality. It can also process any high-quality stereo or Advanced Resolution 5.1-channel music content into a seamless 6.1- or 7.1-channel listening experience.

The Dolby Headphone technology provides a surround sound listening experience over headphones. When listening to multichannel content such as DVD movies over headphones, the listening experience is fundamentally different than listening to speakers. Since the headphone speaker drivers are covering the pinna of the ear, the listening experience differs greatly from traditional speaker playback. Dolby utilizes patented headphone perspective curves to solve this problem and provides a non-fatiguing, immersive, home theater listening experience. Dolby Headphone also delivers exceptional 3D audio from stereo material.

ENGLISH

Dolby Virtual Speaker is a technologycertified by Dolby Laboratories that creates a virtualized surround sound experience from two speakers using a multichannel Dolby Digital source. Additionally, Dolby Virtual Speaker can simulate the surround sound effect produced by Dolby Pro Logic or Dolby Pro Logic II . Dolby Virtual Speaker retains all the original Multichannel audio information and provides the listener with the sensation of being surrounded by additional speakers.

Manufactured under license from Dolby Laboratories. “Dolby”, “Pro Logic”, “Surround EX”, and the doubleD symbol are trademarks of Dolby Laboratories.

Circle Surround II (CS-II ) is a powerful and versatile multichannel technology. CS-II is designed to enable up to 6.1 multichannel surround sound playback from mono, stereo, CS encoded sources and other matrix encoded sources. In all cases the decoder extends it into 6 channels of surround audio and a LFE/subwoofer signal. The CS-II decoder creates a listening environment that places the listener “inside” music performances and dramatically improves both hi-fi audio conventional surround-encoded video material. CS-II provides composite stereo rear channels to greatly improve separation and image positioning– adding a heightened sense of realism to both audio and A/V productions. CS-II is packed with other useful feature like dialog clarity (SRS Dialog) for movies and cinema-like bass enrichment (TruBass). CS-II can enable the dialog to become clearer and more discernable in movies and it enables the bass frequencies contained in the original programming to more closely achieve low frequencies–overcoming the low frequency limitations of the speakers by full octave.

Circle Surround II, Dialog Clarity, TruBass, SRS and

symbol are trademarks of SRS Labs, Inc. Circle Surround II , Dialog Clarity and TruBass technology are incorporated under license from SRS Labs, Inc.

HDCD® (High Deﬁ nition Compatible Digital ®) is a patented process for delivering on Compact Disc the full richness and details of the original microphone feed. HDCD encoded CDs sound better because they are encoded with 20-bits of real musical information as compared to 16-bits for all other CDs. HDCD overcomes the limitation of the 16-bit CD format by using a sophisticated system to encode the additional four bits onto the CD while remaining completely compatible with the CD format. When listening to HDCD recordings, you hear more dynamic range, a focused 3-D sound stage, and extremely natural vocal and musical timbre. With HDCD, you get the body, depth and emotion of the original performance not a ﬂ at, digital imitation. HDCD system manufactured under license from Microsoft. This product is covered by one or more of the following: In the United States 5,479,168 5,638,074 5,640,161 5,808,574 5,838,274 5,854,600 5,864,311 5,872,531 and in Australia 669,114 with other patents pending.

HDMI, the and High-Deﬁ nition Multimedia Interface are trademarks or registered trademarks of HDMI Licensing LLC.

There are several factors that can degrade the sound from even the best loudspeakers in a listening room. One of the most important is the interaction of sound from the loudspeakers with large surfaces such as walls, the ﬂ oor, and the ceiling in the room. Even with careful loudspeaker placement and acoustical treatments, there are signiﬁ cant problems that are caused by room acoustics. These include reﬂ ections from nearby surfaces and standing waves that are created between large parallel surfaces in the room. In a home theater the situation is further complicated because there are several listening locations. The effects of room acoustics on the sound arriving at each person’s ears are very different and the result is a listening experience that is degraded in a different way for every person in the room. It is not uncommon to have variations in two adjacent seats that are as large as 10 dB, particularly in the frequency range below 250 Hz. The solution to this problem is to apply room correction after precisely measuring how each loudspeaker interacts with the room. Because the room causes variations in the frequency response of the loudspeakers that are so large from seat to seat, it is important to measure each loudspeaker at several locations in the listening room. This should be done even if there is only one listener. Measurement at a single location is not representative of the acoustical problems in the room and will in most cases, degrade overall performance. Audyssey MultEQ is the only technology that can achieve room correction for multiple listeners in a large listening area. It does so by combining the data collected at several points in the room from each loudspeaker and then applying correction that minimizes the acoustical effects of the room and is matched to the frequency resolution of human perception (known as psychoacoustics). Furthermore, MultEQ correction is applied both in frequency and time domains and so there are no artifacts (such as smearing of sound or modal ringing)that are sometimes associated with traditional methods of room equalization. In addition to correcting frequency response problems over a wide listening area, Audyssey MultEQ provides a completely automated sound system setup process. It identiﬁ es how many loudspeakers are connected to the ampliﬁ ers and whether they are fullrange, satellites, or subwoofers. If there is a least one subwoofer connected, Audyssey MultEQ determines the optimum crossover frequency between each satellite and the subwoofer(s). It automatically checks the polarity of each loudspeaker and alerts the user if there are any that may be wired out-

of-phase relative to the others. It measures the distance to each loudspeaker from the main listening position and adjusts the delays so that sound from each loudspeaker arrives at the same time. Finally, Audyssey MuitEQ determines the playback level of each loudspeaker and adjusts the volume trims so that all levels are equal.

FEATURES

The SR7001 incorporates the latest generation of digital surround sound decoding technology such as Dolby Digital EX, Dolby Digital, DTS ES (Discrete 6.1 and Matrix 6.1), DTS Neo:6 (Cinema, Music), Dolby Pro-Logic II (Movie, Music and Game), Dolby ProLogic II x (Movie, Music and Game), Circle Surround II (Cinema, Music and Mono). In addition, Marantz has focused on the future. By utilizing pre-out jacks, 7.1 direct inputs and a RS232C communication port, the SR7001 is tomorrow’s technology, today!

• THX Select 2 certiﬁ ed

7ch ampliﬁ ers have enough power for even the most difﬁ cult conditions found in large rooms. Enormous power reserves endow the system with substantial dynamic ability at high sound levels. 110 watts (SR7001) / 125 watts (SR8001) to each of the 7 main channels the power amp section features an advanced, premium high-storage power supply capacitors, and fully discrete output stages housed in cast aluminum heat sinks .

The SR7001 incorporates the most advanced Digital Signal Processing circuitry, along with a

Crystal

192 kHz/24 bit D/A converter in each of the 7 channels. Independent power supply circuits are incorporated for the FL display, audio and video sections for maximum separation, clarity and dynamic range. Together with hand-selected customized components, all elements work in harmony to recreate the emotion, exactly as the artist had intended.

The SR7001 is designed and engineered with extensive feedback from custom installation experts, dealers and consumers. It features multi-room/ multisource, assignable DC trigger, a RS-232C communication port, Flasher input, heavy duty speaker binding posts and an extensive array of both analog and digital inputs / outputs. With 6 assignable digital inputs (7 total), 4 component inputs, Super Audio CD Multi Channel (7.1 channel) direct inputs, video convert system and a speaker-B and OSD output versatility is taken to a stunning new level. Furthermore, the SR7001 can output the OSD information through the Y/C (S-video) and composite video outputs.

An easy-to-use programmable, learning remote control allows full access to all of the operating functions and can be used for system operation as well.

The new generation of Marantz Receivers is stylish and completely symmetrical. On the front panel of the SR7001, buttons are kept to a minimum. Source selectors and volume controls are intuitively placed. The SR7001 is here to perform in your unrivaled home entertainment setup.

• HDMI

HDMI (High-Deﬁ nition Multimedia Interface) is an enhancement to the DVI (Digital Visual Interface) standard. It adds capabilities for digitally transmitting audio signals in addition to video signals. Where multiple cables were previously needed for audio/ video, HDMI enables audio/video connection via a single cable. The HDMI input jacks of this receiver support HDMI Ver. 1.2. and the HDMI output jacks of this transmitter support HDMI Ver. 1.1. Ver. 1.2 supports 1-bit audio formatting and enables transmission of DSD (Direct Stream Digital) signals of Super Audio CD.

This receiver supports HDCP (High-bandwidth Digital Content Protection). HDCP is copyright protection technology that consists of data encoding and other device authentication. Its purpose is to protect digital video content. Both this receiver and the connected component (such as a video player or monitor) must support HDCP. Before connecting a component to this receiver, refer to its instruction manual.

• THX / THX Surround EX

• Dolby Digital EX, Dolby Digital, DTS ES (Discrete 6.1, Matrix 6.1, Neo:6)

• Dolby Pro Logic II (Movie, Music, Game)

• Dolby Pro Logic IIx (Movie, Music, Game)

• Circle Surround II (Cinema, Music, Mono)

• Audyssey Mult EQ

• 7 × 110 Watts (8 Ohms), Discrete Ampliﬁ ers (SR8001: 7 × 125 Watts)

• High Power Current Feedback Circuitry

• Massive Energy Power Supply, Huge EI Transformer, Large ELCO’s.

• 192 kHz/24 bit DAC for all 8 Channels

• 32 bit Digital Surround Processing Chipsets

• Video Off Mode

• Large Heavy Duty Speaker Terminals for all Channels

• RS-232C Terminal for Future Upgrade or System Control Set Up Menu via all Video Output

• (Composite, S-Video, Component video and HDMI)

• Auto Input Signal Detection

• Improved Station Name Input Method, 60 Presets

• Auto Adjust Function for Speaker Distance Settings (Delay Time)

• Front Optical AUX Input (Digital Camera, Portable DVD)

• Programmable, learning remote control

• Video convert system

HDMI ← Component Video ↔ S-Video ↔ Composit Video

• Video I/P Converter

• Assignable Video Input

• Lip Sync (Audio Delay)

• Function Rename

• HDCD

• Dolby Headphone

• Bi-amp drive

• Source/Pure Direct mode

• 9 bands x 7 ch GEQ

• DSD direct conversion

• DSD to PCM converter

• Two component monitor outputs

• Assignable DC Trigger Output

• Troidal Core Transformer (SR8001 only)

• Selectable Multi Room Component Video output (SR8001 only)

• Flasher Input

• IR Recever Input (SR8001 only)

• Emitter Output (SR8001 only)

• Multi Room B output (SR8001 only)

ACCESSORIES

Remote Controller RC8001SR

POWER

OFF

ON/OFF

SOURCE

VOL

LIP.SYNC

MUTE

GUIDE

EXIT

TEST

CH.SEL

SURR

2 31

7.1CH

ATT

SPK-AB

5 64

DISP

OSD

SLEEP

8097

THX

MEMO

CLEAR

DSS

VCRDVD

TUNERCDCD-R

AMP

AUX2

AUX1

TAPE

LIGHT

RC8001SR

Learning Remote Controller

Microphone

AC cable

AAA-size batteries × 3

AM Loop Antenna

FM Antenna

Front AUX Jack Cover

PUSH

User Guide

ENGLISH

FRONT PANEL

q tyur !2 !3 !4ew

AV SURROUND RECEIVER SR8001

INPUT SELECTOR

PURE DIRECT

DSD

SURROUND

MODE AUTO

STANDBY

POWER ON/OFF

PHONES

q POWER switch and STANDBY

indicator

Press the button to turn the power ON, and press again to turn it OFF. If the POWER switch is in the ON position, the power of this unit can be turned ON/ OFF by pressing the POWER button on the remote control unit. When this unit is in the standby mode with the

POWER switch set to the ON position, pressing the ENTER button also allows to turn the power on.

The STANDBY indicator lights up when this unit is the standby mode (power OFF) by the remote control unit.

INPUT SELECTOR knob (AUDIO/ VIDEO)

This knob is used to select the input sources. The video function selectors, such as TV, DVD, VCR1, DSS and AUX1 select video and audio simultaneously. Audio function sources such as TAPE, CD/CDR, TUNER and AUX2 may be selected in conjunction with a Video source. This feature (Sound Injection) combines a sound from one source with a picture from another. Choose the video source ﬁ rst, and then choose a different audio source to activate this function.

PURE DIRECT THX

!5 !6 !7 @1 @3

SURR DIRECT

SLEEP

AUTO

MULTI

7.1CH INPUT

!8 @0 @2!9

MULTI

SPEAKER

DISC 6.1 MTX 6.1 EQ

io!0!1

VOLUME

V-OFFDISP MULTI AUTO TUNED ST SPKR A B

ENTER

SURROUND

PEAK ANALOG

ATT

DIGITAL

NIGHT

LCR

LFE

AAC

PCM

SL S SR

MEMORY CLEAR

BAND

T-MODE

DISPLAY

SPEAKERS

A/B

MultEQ

EXIT

MIC

HEADPHONE jack for stereo headphones

DOWN

AUX 1 INPUT

DIGITAL

S-VIDEO

RLVIDEO

AUDIO

This jack may be used to listen to the SR7001’s output through a pair of headphones. Be certain that the headphones have a standard 1/4” stereo phono plug. Note that the main room speakers will automatically be turned off when the headphone jack is in use.

Notes:

• When using headphones, the surround mode will change to STEREO and Dolby Headphone by MENU and Cursor button.

• The surround mode returns to the previous setting as soon as the headphone plug is removed from the jack.

r SURROUND MODE button

You can select the surround mode by pressing this button.

t AUTO (Auto surround) button

Press this button to select the AUTO mode from the surround modes. When this mode is selected, the receiver determines the surround mode corresponding to a digital input signal automatically.

y MULTI (Multi Room) button

Press this button to activate the Multiroom system. “MULTI” indicator will be illuminated in the display. (See page 52)

u MULTI SPEAKER button

Press this button to activate the Multiroom Speaker system. “MULTI” indicator will be illuminated in the display.

(See page 52)

i BAND button

Press this button to switch between FM and AM in the TUNER mode.

o T-MODE button

Press this button to select the auto stereo mode or mono mode when the FM band is selected. The “AUTO” indicator lights in the auto stereo mode. (See page 48)

!0 MEMORY button

Press this button to enter the tuner preset memory numbers or station names. (See page 49)

!1 CLEAR button

Press this button to cancel the station-memory setting mode or preset scan tuning. (See page 50)

INFRARED receiving sensor window

This window receives infrared signals for the remote control.

!3 VOLUME control knob

Adjusts the overall sound level. Turning the control clockwise increases the sound level.

!4 AUX1 INPUT jacks

These auxiliary video/audio input jacks accept the connections of a camcorder, portable DVD, game etc. When not using these jacks, protect with the included jack covers.

How to Attach the Front AUX Jack Cover

DIGITAL

S-VIDEO

AUX 1 INPUT

VIDEO

AUDIO

PUSH

Front AUX Jack Cover

PURE DIRECT button and indicator

When this button is pressed once, “SOURCE DIRECT” appears on the FL display. If pressed

again, “PURE DIRECT” appears. After 2 seconds, the FL display indication goes out. In the source/pure direct mode, the tone control circuitry and bass management are bypassed.

Notes:

• The surround mode is automatically switched to AUTO when the pure direct function is turned on.

• Additionally, speaker configurations are fixed automatically as follows.

Front SPKR = LARGE Center SPKR = LARGE Surround SPKR = LARGE Surround Back SPKR = LARGE Sub woofer = YES

!6 THX button

Press this button to select THX processing for input source.

!7 7.1CH INPUT button

Press this button to select the output of an external multichannel player.

!8 MENU button

This button is used to enter the SETUP MAIN MENU.

Cursor (

5, ∞, 2, 3)

/ ENTER button

Use these buttons when operating the SETUP MAIN MENU and TUNER function.

@0 EXIT button

This button is used to exit from the SETUP MAIN MENU.

@1 DISPLAY button

When this button is pressed, the FL display mode is changed as Input display → Surround Mode → Auto-display Off → Display Off → Function name display and the display off indicator (DISP) lights up is condition DISPLAY OFF.

@2 MultEQ button / MIC jack

Press to automatically measure speaker characteristics using the included microphone. (See page 27)

™

@3 SPEAKER A/B button

Press this button to select speaker systems A and/or B.

Opening and closing the front panel door

When you want to use the controls behind the front panel door, open the door by gently pressing on the lower part of the panel. Keep the door closed when not using these controls.

AV SURROUND RE

I N

P U

T S

E L

IVE

R SR7001

D I S

ST AN

DB Y

P O

E R

O N

Caution:

• Be careful not to pinch your ﬁ ngers between the door and the panel.

A U

/ O F

I R

T C T

S P

R D IS

F F

MTX

A K

PHONES

H T

N A L

G IG I T A

S U R R

O U

A L

L F

S R

O L

U M

E N

DOWN

IG IT

S-VI

X 1

IN P

ID EO

A U

DIO

FL DISPLAY AND INDICATER

DISP MULTI AUTO TUNED ST V – OFF NIGHT PEAK ANALOG

SURR

AUTO

SLEEP

h k¡0 ¡1 ¡3f

j l

DISC 6.1DIRECT MTX 6.1 SPKR AB

a DISP (Display Off) indicator

This indicator is illuminated when the SR7001 is in the display off condition.

s SLEEP timer indicator

This indicator is illuminated when the sleep timer function in the main-room is in use.

d Multi-room system indicator

This indicator is illuminated when the multi-room system is active.

f AUTO SURR

(Auto Surround mode) indicator

This indicator is illuminated to show that the AUTO SURROUND mode is in use.

g TUNER’s indicators

AUTO : This indicator illuminates when the

TUNED : This indicator illuminates when

ST(Stereo) : This indicator illuminates when an

tuner’s Auto mode is in use.

a station is being received with sufﬁ cient signal strength to provide acceptable listening quality.

FM station is being tuned into stereo condition.

¡2

ATT

DIGITAL

PCM

¡4

SURROUND

DIGITAL

LCR

LFE

SL S SR

k NIGHT mode indicator

This indicator is illuminated when the SR7001 is in the Night mode, which reduces the dynamic range of digital program material at low volume levels.

l SPKR (speaker) AB indicator

Active speaker system will be illuminated by this indicator.

¡0 PEAK indicator

This indicator is a monitor for an analog audio input signal. If the selected analog audio input signal is greater than the capable level of internal processing, this will illuminate. If this happens, you should press the ATT button on the remote. (See page 9)

¡1 ATT (Attenuation) indicator

This indicator is illuminated when the attenuation function is active.

¡2 DIGITAL Input Indicator

This indicator lights when a digital input has been selected.

¡3 ANALOG input indicator

This indicator is illuminated when an analog input source has been selected.

This indicator is illuminated when a DTS ES signal is input.

96/24

This indicator is illuminated when a DTS 96/24 signal is input.

PCM

This indicator is illuminated when the input signal is PCM (pulse code modulation).

2 SURROUND

This indicator is illuminated when a Dolby Surround signal is input.

¡5

ENCODED CHANNEL STATUS indicators

These indicators display the channels that are encoded with a digital input signal. If the selected digital input signal is Dolby Digital 5.1ch or DTS 5.1ch, “L”, “C”, “R”, “SL”, “SR” and “LFE” will be illuminated.If the digital input signal is 2 channel PCM-audio, “L” and “R” will be displayed. If Dolby Digital 5.1ch signal with Surround EX ﬂ ag or DTS-ES signal comes in, “L”, “C”, “R”, “SL”, “S” , “SR” and “LFE” will be illuminated.

¡6 Main Information Display

This display shows messages relating to the status, input source, surround mode, tuner, volume level or other aspects of unit’s operation.

¡7 SOURCE DIRECT indicator

This indicator is illuminated when the SR7001 is in the SOURCE DIRECT mode.

¡8 DSD indicator

This indicator illuminates when a DSD (Direct Stream Digital) signal of an Super Audio CD is input via the audio signal included in the HDMI input signal.

¡9 PURE DIRECT indicator

This indicator is illuminated when the SR7001 is in the PURE DIRECT mode.

ENGLISH

DTS-ES mode indicators (DISC6.1, MTX6.1)

These indicators will illuminate to show the DTS-ES decoding mode (Discrete 6.1 or Matrix 6.1).

j V (video)-OFF mode indicator

This indicator is illuminated when the Video-OFF function is active.

¡4 SIGNAL FORMAT indicators

2 DIGITAL This indicator is illuminated when a Dolby Digital signal is input.

This indicator is illuminated when a Dolby Digital EX signal is input.

dts

This indicator is illuminated when a DTS signal is input.

™0 HDCD indicator

When HDCD signal is decoded, this indicator will light up.

™1 HDMI indicator

This indicator illuminates when an HDMI device is connected to the input and a link is established.

ENGLISH

REAR PANEL

)

INPUT 2(DVD

INPUT 1(TV

FM (75Ω)GND AM

@3 @2

TV(1

VIDEO

q FM antenna terminal (75 ohms)

Connect an external FM antenna with a coaxial cable, or a cable network FM source.

AM antenna and ground terminals

Connect the supplied AM loop antenna. Use the terminals marked “AM” and “GND”. The supplied AM loop antenna will provide good AM reception in most areas. Position the loop antenna until you hear the best reception.

w COMPONENT VIDEO INPUT/

If your DVD player or other device has component video connectors, be sure to connect them to these component video connectors on the SR7001. The SR7001 has 4 component video input connectors to obtain the color information (Y, CB, CR) directly from the recorded DVD signal or other video component and two component video outputs connector to output it directly into the matrix decoder of the display device. By sending the pure DVD component video signal directly, the DVD signal forgoes the extra processing that normally would degrade the image. The result is vastly increased image quality, with incredibly life like colors and crisp detail.

OUTPUT

ANTENNA

COMPONENT

)

INPUT 2(DVD

)

DVD(2

DIGITAL IN

DVD SL

DSS/VCR2(4

VCR1(3

INOUT

DIGITAL OUT

COAX.

35421

OPT.

DSS/VCR2

VCR1

OUT

VIDEO

INPUT 3(VCR1

RC-5 MULTI RC

YYY

)

MONITOR

OUT

!8!9

)

INPUT 3(VCR1

)

INPUT 4(DSS/VCR2

)

MULTI

TV(1

OUT

DC OUT

OUT

OUTIN

ININ

AUDIO

!7!6 e

OUTPUT 1 OUTPUT 2INPUT 1(TV

DVD(2

FLASHER

OUT

)

INPUT 4(DSS/VCR2

)

IN OUT

RECEIVER

MULTI OUT

)

DSS/VCR2(4

VCR1(3

IN OUT

EMITTER

RSR

OUT

LTAPE CD/CDR

(

)

AUX2

!4 !2

rqw y ut

OFF

FRONT A OR B.CENTER.SURR. SURR BACK : MINIMUM 6 OHMS FRONT A + B : MINIMUM 8 OHMS

SPEAKER SYSTEMS

FRONT

OUT

PUT

OUT

PUT

HDMI Ver1.2

)

MONI. OUT

S-VIDEO

SLL

SBL

SBR

SBL

SBR

MODEL NO. SR8001

RS-232C

AC IN

PRE OUT

7.1CH IN

SURROUND

BACK

MULTI SPEAKER

/SPEAKER C

SUB SPEAKER

AC OUTLET

230V 50/60Hz

SWITCHED

0.65A 150W

io!0!1!3

e Multiroom Outputs (Audio output

A/B, Video)

These are the audio and video output jacks for the Multi zone (Multi room). Connect these jacks to optional audio power ampliﬁ ers or video display devices to listen and view the source selected by the multiroom system in a remote room.

r MONITOR OUT

These are monitor outputs and each one includes both composite video and S-video conﬁ gurations. When connecting two video monitors or televisions, be aware that the OSD interface can be used with both MONITOR OUT connections.

t RS-232C

The RS-232C port is to be used in conjunction with an external controller to control the operation of the SR7001 by using an external device. The RS-232C port may also be used in the future to update the operating software of the SR7001 so that it will be able to support new digital audio formats and the like as they are introduced.

y Sub Speaker outputs terminals

(MULTI SPEAKER / SPEAKER C)

Two terminals are provided for the front left, and right speakers for multi room. The terminals can be used to connect a third set of speakers by setting the SPEAKER C selector switch to ON. For connection and use, see page 19.

u Speaker outputs terminals

Nine terminals are provided for the front (A) left, front (A) right, front (B) left, front (B) right, front center, surround left, surround right, surround back left and surround back right speakers.

!1 Preamp Outputs

(L, R, SL, SR, SBL, SBR, C)

Jacks for L (front left), R (front right), C (Center), SL (surround left), SR (surround right), SBL (surround back left) and SBR (surround back right). Use these jacks for connection to external power ampliﬁ ers.

!2 Subwoofer Output

Connect this jack to the line level input of a powered subwoofer. If an external subwoofer ampliﬁ er is used, connect this jack to the subwoofer ampliﬁ er input. If you are using two subwoofers, either powered or with a 2 channel subwoofer ampliﬁ er, connect a “Y”

CEN TER

i SPEAKER C switch

Set to ON to connect a bi-amp to this receiver or set

SURR.

to OFF for normal speaker connection (surround back and multiroom speakers). (See page 19)

connector to the subwoofer output jack and run one cable from it to each subwoofer ampliﬁ er.

!3 7.1 CHANNEL or AUX2 INPUT

By connecting a DVD Audio player, Super Audio CD

o AC OUTLETS

Connect the AC power cables of components such as a DVD and CD player to these outlets. SWITCHED and

multichannel player, or other components that has a multichannel port, you can playback the audio with

5.1 channel or 7.1 channel outputs.

UNSWITCHED outlets are provided. The one marked SWITCHED provides power only when the SR7001 is turned on and is useful for components which you use every time you play your system.

!4 EMITTER OUT (SR8001 only)

The signals input to the IR RECEIVER IN terminals are output to this terminal. External devices can be

controlled by connecting them to this terminal. The one marked UNSWITCHED is always live as long as the SR7001 is plugged into a live outlet. A component connected here may be left on permanently, or may be switched off with via its own

!5 IR RECEIVER IN (SR8001 only)

Connect to an external IR receiver. power switch.

Caution:

• In order to avoid potential turn-off thumps, anything plugged into these outlets should be powered up before the SR7001 is turned on.

• The capacity of this AC outlet is 150W. Do not connect devices that consume electricity more than the capacity of these AC outlets. If the total power consumption of the connected devices exceeds the capacity, the protection circuit shuts down the power supply.

FLASHER IN (Flasher input terminal)

These terminals are to control the unit from each zone. Connect the control signal from a Keypad, etc.

!7 DC TRIGGER output terminal

Connect a device that needs to be triggered by DC under certain conditions (screen, power strip, etc…) Use the system OSD setup menu to determine the conditions by which these jack will be active.

Note:

!0 AC INLET

Plug the supplied power cord into this AC INLET and then into the power outlet on the wall. SR7001 can be powered by 120V AC only.

• This output voltage is for (status) control only, It is not sufﬁ cient for drive capability.

MULTI ROOM REMOTE IN/OUT terminals

IN: Connect to a multi-room remote control

device, available from your Marantz dealer.

OUT: Connect to the Marantz component equipped

with remote control (RC-5) terminals in Multi zone (Multi room).

!9 REMOTE CONT. IN/OUT terminals

Connect to a Marantz component equipped with remote control (RC-5) terminals.

@0 AUDIO IN/OUT (TV, DVD, VCR1,

DSS/VCR2, TAPE, CD/CDR)

These are the analog audio inputs and outputs. There are 6 audio inputs (4 of which are linked to video inputs) and 4 audio outputs (2 of which are linked to video outputs). The audio jacks are nominally labeled for cassette tape decks, compact disc players, DVD

players and etc.... The audio inputs and outputs

require RCA-type connectors.

@1 DIGITAL INPUT (Dig.1 - 6) /

OUTPUT (coaxial, optical)

These are the digital audio inputs and outputs. There are 3 digital inputs with coaxial jacks, 3 with optical jacks. The inputs accept digital audio signals from a compact disc, LD, DVD, or other digital source component. For digital output, there is 1 coaxial output and 1 optical output. The digital outputs can be connected to MD recorders, CD recorders, DAT decks, or other similar components.

VIDEO IN/OUT (TV, DVD, VCR1, DSS/ VCR2)

These are the video inputs and outputs. There are 4 video inputs and 2 video outputs and each one includes both composite video and S-video conﬁ gurations. Connect VCRs, DVD players, and other video components to the video inputs. The 2 video output channels can be used to be connected to video tape recorders for making recordings.

@3 HDMI INPUT / OUTPUT

This unit has 4 HDMI inputs and 1 HDMI output. The input function can be selected from the OSD menu system. (See page 15) (The SR8001 has 2 HDMI outputs.)

REMOTE CONTROLLER

z Infrared Transmitter and Learning

RC8001SR

NAMES AND FUNCTIONS

POWER

OFF

ON/OFF

SOURCE

¤1

¤0

⁄9

⁄8

⁄7

TUNER

TAPE

LIP·SYNC

GUIDE

TEST

CH.SEL

2 31

7.1CH

ATT

5 64

DISP

OSD

THX

CLEAR

AUX1

LIGHT

RC8001SR

Learning Remote Controller

VCRDVD

CD-R

AUX2

VOL

MUTE

EXIT

SURR

SPK-AB

SLEEP

MEMO

c v

, .

⁄0 ⁄1

⁄2⁄6

⁄3

DSS

AMP

⁄4

⁄5

This transmitter emits infrared light. Press the buttons while pointing the transmitter towards the infrared receiver window of the SR7001 or other AV equipment. Be sure to also point towards other remote controls when using the learning function.

x POWER ON and OFF buttons

(When AMP mode is selected)

These buttons are used to turn the SR7001 on or off.

c SOURCE ON/OFF button

This button is used to turn a speciﬁ c source (such as a DVD player) on or off independently from the rest of the system.

v M (Mode) button

This button is used to program Macros. Pressing this button switches between Normal mode and Macro mode. The > button is used to move to the next page. Up to 20 programs (4 pages) can be made. Holding down the M button for three seconds or more switches to the Setup mode, where the Setup menu is shown on the LCD. The Setup menu has four pages, and the > button is used to move to the next page. Pressing the > button from page 4 returns you to page 1.

b D1 to D5 (Direct) buttons

Five types of direct operations can be performed for each of the 12 source buttons such as the DVD, television, ampliﬁ er, and other AV equipment. The pages can be switched, so 4 pages × 5 types = 20 operations can be performed for a single source. The text display can also be changed.

n > (Page) button

This button is used to switch pages for the Direct button. The current page is shown on the LCD.

m VOL (Volume) button

This button is used to adjust the volume for the ampliﬁ er and television.

Note:

Sensor

• Set the AMP mode to use this button with the SR7001.

, MUTE button

This button is used to mute the audio for the SR7001 and television.

Note:

• Set the AMP mode to use this button with the SR7001.

. GUIDE button

This button is used to display the menus for the DVD player, DSS (satellite broadcasting tuner), or other AV equipment.

(when AMP mode is selected)

This button is used to select the LIP.SYNC mode.

⁄0 EXIT button

(when AMP mode is selected)

This button is used to cancel settings in the setup menu.

⁄1 Numeric buttons

These buttons are used to switch between 0 to 9 of the source components. If the source is set to the amplifier, these buttons are used to perform operations.

(when AMP mode is selected) (1) TEST button

Used to enter the test tone menu.

(2) CH SEL. (channel select) button

Used to call up SETUP MAIN MENU and adjust speaker levels or 7.1 ch input level.

(3) SURR (surround) button

Used to select the surround mode.

(4) 7.1CH button

Press this button to select the output of an external multi channel decoder.

(5) ATT button

When the input signal is too high and the voice distorts even by throttling the SR7001 VOLUME control, turn on this function. “ATT” is indicated when this function is activated. The input level is reduced. Attenuator is invalid for use with the output signal of “REC OUT”.

Note:

• This function is unavailable during the digital input is selected.

(6) SPK-AB button

Speaker mode is switched in the following sequence. A → B → A+B → off

ENGLISH

(7) DISP. button

Selects the display mode for the front display of the SR7001.

(8) OSD button

When this button is pressed, the current setting are displayed on the TV monitor.

(9) SLEEP (sleep timer) button

This button is used for setting the sleep timer. It can be operated the same way as the button in unit.

(0) THX button

Use this button to select the THX mode.

⁄2 MEMO button

This button is used to store settings to memory or program a source.

⁄3 CONTROL button

Thses buttons are used when operating the PLAY, STOP, PAUSE, and other commands of a source.

Note:

• This button is unavailable for the SR7001.

⁄4 SOURCE button

Thses buttons are used to switch the source of your A/V Receiver / amplifer. Each time a source button is pressed, the remote control changes to the source which was pressed. This remote control can control 12 types of equipment. To change the A/V Receiver / ampliﬁ er source, press this button twice within two seconds. The signal is sent when it is pressed the second time.

Note:

• Select the AMP as the source to use this remote controll with the SR7001.

• The MD button does not work with the SR7001.

⁄7 MENU button

(when AMP mode is selected)

This button is used to call up the SETUP MAIN MENU of the SR7001.

⁄8 PREV (Previous) button

This button is used to return to the previous channel on the television or other device.

Note:

• This button is unavailable for SR7001.

⁄9 CH (Channel) button

This is used to change channels.

¤0 CURSOR buttons

These buttons are used when controlling the cursor of the SR7001, DVD, or other AV equipment.

¤1 LCD

Information about the sources and modes are shown on the LCD.

LCD INDICATORS

Information about currently selected source and direct code names are displayed on the LCD.

J I H

LEARN

NAME

MACRO

G F

USE

PAGE

123

C D

A Source Name indicator

This displays the name of the selected source, such as DVD, television, or other AV equipment (up to ﬁ ve characters).

B Direct Button Name indicator

This displays up to 20 types of button names for each source. (up to six characters)

C Page indicator

This displays the current page position.

D Transmission indicator

This lights up when the remote control is sending a signal.

I NAME indicator

This is displayed when the remote control is in renaming mode.

J LEARN indicator

This is displayed when the remote control is in learning mode.

⁄5 LIGHT 1 and 2 buttons

Pressing these buttons will light up the LCD and its buttons. This lighting time can be set. If the lighting time is set to 0 seconds, the backlight turns on only while this button is pressed. The operations for LIGHT 1 and 2 are identical.

⁄6 CLEAR button

This button is used to erase the memory or program of a source.

E USE indicator

This is displayed under normal operation.

F Battery Level indicator

This is displayed when the battery level is low.

G TIMER indicator

This is displayed when the macro timer is set.

H MACRO indicator

This is displayed when the remote control is in macro programming mode.

REMOTE CONTROL RANGE

The distance between the transmitter of the remote control and the IR SENSOR of the SR7001 should be less than 5 meters. If the remote control is pointed in a direction other than the IR SENSOR or if there is an obstacle between them, use of the remote control may not be possible.

Remote-controllable range

SR7001

A V S U

R R

O U

LEC

E C E

I V

E R S R 7 1 00

D I S P

T A N

D B

I R

T C T

R D I

A S C

B 6 .

F F

T X

E . 1

A K

T I G

H O

A L

O D G I G I T A L

S U R R O U

IT A L

C M

L F E S L S S R

V O L U M E

E N

T E R

D O W N

D I G I T A L

V A I D

1 I N P U

T V I

D E O

L A

U D I O

T U N E

R TA PE

L IGHT

Learn i

n RC1 g Re

400 m o te

ntr

T E S T

. 1 C H

D I S

T T

C LEA

O S

S L

E E P

M O

D V D

C R

CD-

S S

A U X2

M D

M P

Approx. 5 m

60°

O FF

P O W

O N

/ O

F S O

U R C

1 D 2

C H

4 D

D 5

O L

K EV

U I D E

MUTE

. S E L

E X I T

U RR

S PK

-A

Remote control unit (RC8001SR)

LOADING BATTERIES

The life of the batteries used with the remote control is about 4 months with normal use. Also be sure to replace batteries earlier when you notice that they are getting weak.

1. Remove the back cover.

2. Insert the new batteries (AAA type) with correct and polarity.

3. Close the cover until it clicks.

CAUTIONS ON BATTERIES

• Use “AAA” type batteries in this remote control unit.

• We recommend that you use alkali batteries.

• If the remote control unit does not operate from close to the main unit, replace the batteries with new ones, even if less then a year has passed.

• The included battery is only for verifying operation. Replace it with a new battery as soon as possible.

• When inserting the batteries, be careful to do so in the proper direction, following the + and - marks in the remote control unit’s battery compartment.

• To prevent damage or battery ﬂ uid leakage:

- Do not use a new battery with an old one.

- Do not use two different types of batteries.

- Do not short-circuit, disassemble, heat or

dispose of batteries in ﬂ ames.

• Remove the batteries when not planning to use the remote control unit for a long period of time.

• If the batteries should leak, carefully wipe off the ﬂ uid from the inside of the battery compartment, then insert new batteries.

• When disposing of used batteries, please comply with governmental regulations or environmental public instruction’s rules that apply in your country or area.

BATTERY REPLACEMENT INTERVAL

Under normal usage, alkaline batteries last approximately four months. When the batteries wear out, a battery mark is displayed on the LCD. Although the remote control can still be used when the battery mark is displayed, the batteries should be replaced as soon as possible. The LCD eventually starts to ﬂ ash when buttons are pressed, the remote control will be unable to transmit signals or learn codes.

• This remote control uses non-volatile memory so that the learned codes and macro programs are retained even if the batteries are removed.

Reset the clock after replacing the batteries.

Safety Precautions for Batteries

Be sure to always observe the following precautions to prevent ﬂ uid leakage, overheating, ﬁ re, breakage, accidental ingestion, and other accidents.

• If the batteries are left unused for a long period of time, the battery ﬂ uid may leak or the batteries may corrode.

• Do not use the batteries in the remote control with the plus and minus polarity reversed.

•

Do not attempt to recharge, heat, or disassemble the batteries. Do not put the batteries in a ﬁ re.

• Do not use the remote control with old batteries or worn-out batteries inserted.

• Do not use different types of batteries or mix old and new batteries in the remote control.

• If the remote control is not operating properly, replace the batteries with new ones.

• If any of the batteries are leaking, completely wipe up all leaked battery ﬂ uid, and then replace the batteries with new ones.

SETTING THE TIME

Example: Setting to 6:20PM (18:20)

1 2

POWER

OFF

ON/OFF

SOURCE

LIP.SYNC

GUIDE

TEST

CH.SEL

7.1CH

ATT

DISP

OSD

THX

CLEAR

TUNERCDCD-R

AUX1

TAPE

LIGHT

RC8001SR

Learning Remote Controller

When you bought this remote control and insert the batteries to the remote control at ﬁ rst, the steps 1 to 3 are skipped. Starts from step 4 to set the time.

Hold down the M button for three seconds or

more.

The menu is displayed.

2. Press the > button once.

This displays second page (SETUP).

3. Press the D4 (CLOCK) direct button.

The “ ” indicator blinks and the clock indicator

displays “0:00”.

4. Press the 1 and 8 numeric button to set the hour indicator.

The hour indicator displays “18”. The minute indicator blinks “_”.

5. Press the 2 and 0 numeric button to set the minute indicator.

The minute indicator displays “20”. The hour indicator blinks.

6. Press the OK cursor button to start the clock.

The clock starts from 0 second at the time that was

set and return to normal (USE) mode.

Whenever the batteries are replaced, the clock shows 00:00. Please reset the clock. (The time setting is not backed up.)

VOL

MUTE

EXIT

SURR

2 31

SPK-AB

5 64

SLEEP

8097

MEMO

DSS

VCRDVD

AMP

AUX2

USE

PAGE

3 4

LEARN

5 6

LEARN

USE

PAGE

LEARN

USE

PAGE

ENGLISH

CHECKING THE TIME

To check the time, hold down the > button for three seconds or more. The current time is displayed for ﬁ ve seconds.

Note:

• Although the remote control uses a quartz clock, the time may become out of sync over the course of operation. Be sure to correct the clock from time to time.

GENERAL INFORMATION OF RC8001SR TO SR7001

To control the SR7001 by your RC8001SR, you have to select the device AMP or TUNER by pressing the function selector button. Please refer below for the details in AMP and TUNER mode.

AMP MODE

POWER

OFF

ON/OFF

OFF

ON/OFF

SOURCE

USE

PAGE

123

CLEAR

TUNERCDCD-R

TAPE

VOL

LIP.SYNC

MUTE

GUIDE

EXIT

TEST

CH.SEL

SURR

TEST

CH.SEL

SURR

2 31

7.1CH

ATT

SPK-AB

7.1CH

ATT

SPK-AB

5 64

DISP

OSD

SLEEP

DISP

OSD

SLEEP

8097

8 97

THX

MEMO

DSS

VCRDVD

AMP

AUX2

AUX1

AUX2

AUX1

AMP

LIGHT

RC8001SR

Learning Remote Controller

SOURCE ON/OFF Turns the SR7001 on and off POWER ON Turns the SR7001 on POWER OFF Turns the SR7001 off D1 - D5 / >(Page) (Refer to page vi) VOL +/- Adjust the over all sound level MUTE Decreases the sound temporarily Cursor Move the cursor for setting in SETUP MENU mode OK Enter the SETUP MENU

Conﬁ rms the setting in SETUP MENU mode MENU Enter the SETUP MENU EXIT Exits from SETUP MENU TEST (1) Enter the test tone menu CH.SEL (2) Call up SETUP MENU and adjusts speaker levels or 7.1ch

input setup SURR (3) Selects the surround mode

7.1CH (4) Selects the 7.1CH IN ATT (5) Reduces the input level SPK-AB (6) Selects the speaker system DISP (7) Changes the front display mode OSD (8) Displays the current setting on the monitor SLEEP (9) Sets the sleep timer function THX (0) Selects the THX mode Function selector Selects a particular source component GUIDE / LIP.SYNC Selects the LIP.SYNC mode

TUNER MODE

OFF

TEST

7.1CH

DISP

CLEAR

TUNERCDCD-R

TUNER

TAPE

USE

AUX1

Learning Remote Controller

D1 - D5 / >(Page) (Refer to page vi)

POWER

ON/OFF

SOURCE

PAGE

VOL

LIP.SYNC

MUTE

GUIDE

EXIT

CH.SEL

SURR

CH.SEL

SURR

2 31

ATT

SPK-AB

ATT

SPK-AB

5 64

OSD

SLEEP

OSD

SLEEP

8097

8 97

THX

MEMO

DSS

VCRDVD

AMP

AUX2

LIGHT

RC8001SR

CH +/- Selects a preset station up and down GUIDE Selects the “Frequency direct input” 0–9 Input the numeric MEMO Enter the tuner preset memory numbers CLEAR Clears the inputting TUNER Selects a frequency band

CONNECTIONS

SPEAKER SYSTEMS

FRONT A OR B.CENTER.SURR. SURR BACK

: MINIMUM 6 OHMS

FRONT A + B : :

MINIMUM 8 OHMS

FRONT

SURR.

CEN TER

FRONT

SURROUND

BACK

PRE OUT

SPEAKER PLACEMENT

The ideal surround speaker system for this unit is 7speaker systems, using front left and right speakers, a center speaker, surround left and right speakers, a surround back left and right speakers, and a subwoofer. For best results we recommend that all front speakers be of the same type, with identical or similar driver units. This will deliver smooth pans across the front sound stage as the action moves from side to side. Your center channel speaker is very important as over 80 % of the dialog from a typical motion picture emanates from the center channel. It should possess similar sonic characteristics to the main speakers. Surround channel speakers need not be identical to the front channel speakers, but they should be of high quality. The surround center speaker is useful for playback of Dolby Digital Surround EX or DTS-ES. One of the beneﬁ ts of both Dolby Digital and DTS is that surround channels are discrete full range, while they were frequency limited in earlier “Pro Logic” type systems. Bass effects are an important part of home theater. For optimal enjoyment a subwoofer should be used as it is optimized for low frequency reproduction. If you have full range front speakers, however, they may be used in place of a subwoofer with proper setting of the switches in the menu system.

90°

Subwoofer

Front Left

Front Center

30°

Front Right

0°

22°

Surround Left

Surround Back Left

Surround Back Right

150°

135°

Surround Right

110°

Front left and right speakers

We recommend to set the front L and R speakers with 45-60 degrees from the listening position.

Center speaker

Align the front line of the center speaker with the front L/R speakers. Or place the center speaker a little backward from the line.

Surround left and right speakers

When the SR7001 is used in surround operation, the preferred location for surround speakers is on the side walls of the room, at or slightly behind the listening position. The center of the speaker should face into the room.

Surround back left and right speakers

Surround back speakers are required when a full 7.1channel system is installed. Speakers should be placed on a rear wall, behind the listening position. The center of the speaker should face into the room.

Subwoofer

We recommend using a sub-woofer to have maximum bass effect. Sub-woofer bears only low frequency range so you can place it any where in the room.

HEIGHT OF THE SPEAKER UNITS

Front left and right speakers, and a center speaker

Align the tweeters and mid-range drivers on the three front speakers at the same height, as best as possible.

Surround left and right speakers, and surround back speaker

Place the surround left, right and surround back speakers higher than your ears by about 70cm–1m. Also place the speakers at the same height, as best as possible.

70cm 1m

Note:

• Use magnetically-shielded speakers for front left, right and the center speakers when the speakers are installed near the TV and the TV is a monitor type.

CONNECTING SPEAKERS

)

TV(1

DC OUTDIGITAL IN

ININ

Powered

subwoofer

)

INPUT 2(DVD

INPUT 4(DSS/VCR2

OUTPUT 1 OUTPUT 2INPUT 1(TV

)

DVD(2

VCR1(3

IN OUT

RECEIVER

FLASHER

MULTI OUT

OUT

)

HDMI Ver1.2

)

DSS/VCR2(4

MONI. OUT

S-VIDEO

IN OUT

SLL

SBL

EMITTER

RSR

SBR

OUT

LTAPE CD/CDR

SBL

SBR

(

)

AUX2

Passive

subwoofer

Power

Ampliﬁ er

INVERT

INPUT

BTL REMOTE CONT.EXT. CONT. IN

INPUT

OUTPUT

LEVEL

MASTERSLAVE

MIN MAX

VIDEO/

SYSTEM OUT OUT

+5~13V DC

SPEAKER SYSTEM MINIMUM 4 OHMS

INPUT 1(TV

ANTENNA

FM (75Ω)GND AM

)

INPUT 2(DVD

)

DVD(2

TV(1

VCR1(3

VIDEO

DIGITAL OUT

35421

VCR1

DVD SL

OUT

COMPONENT

DSS/VCR2(4

)

INOUT

COAX.

OPT.

DSS/VCR2

VIDEO

INPUT 3(VCR1

OUT

RC-5MULTI RC

OUT

)

MONITOR

YYY

INPUT 3(VCR1

)

INPUT 4(DSS/VCR2

MULTI

OUT

OUTIN

AUDIO

CONNECTING SPEAKER WIRE

1. Strip away approx. 3/8 inch (10 mm) of wire insulation.

Twist the bared wire ends tight, to prevent short

circuits. Loosen the knob by turning it counterclockwise.

4. Insert the bare part of the wire into the hole in side of each terminal.

Tighten the knob by turning it clockwise to

secure the wire.

Surround

BACK

Right

OUT

MODEL NO. SR8001

PUT

RS-232C

OUT PUT

PRE OUT

7.1CH IN

Left

SURROUND

BACK

SUB SPEAKER

AC OUTLET

230V 50/60Hz

SWITCHED

0.65A 150W

MULTI SPEAKER

/SPEAKER C

OFF

FRONT A OR B.CENTER.SURR. SURR BACK FRONT A + B

AC IN

Right Left

Surround

1. 2.

3/8 inch (10 mm)

3. 4. 5.

FRONT A

Right

SPEAKER SYSTEMS

: MINIMUM 6 OHMS

MINIMUM 8 OHMS

Left

ENGLISH

FRONT B

Left

Right

FRONT

CEN TER

SURR.

Center

ENGLISH

OUT

TAPE

CD/CDR

OUTININININ

DIGITAL IN

AUDIO

DIGITAL OUT

Caution:

•

Be sure to use speakers with the speciﬁ ed impedance as shown on the rear panel of this unit.

•

To prevent damage to circuitry, do not let the bare speaker wires touch each other and do not let them touch any metal part of this unit.

• Do not touch the speaker terminals when the power is on. It may cause you to receive an electric shocks.

• Do not connect more than one speaker cable to one speaker terminal. Doing so may damage this unit.

Note:

Be sure to connect the positive and negative cables for

• the speaker properly. If they are miss-connected, the signal phase will be reversed and the signal quality will be corrupted.

CONNECTING A SUBWOOFER

Use the PRE OUT SUBWOOFER jack to connect a powered subwoofer (power ampliﬁ er built in ). If your subwoofer is a passive type (power ampliﬁ er is not built in), connect a monaural power ampliﬁ er to the PRE OUT SUBWOOFER jack and connect the subwoofer to the ampliﬁ er.

CONNECTING AUDIO COMPONENTS

CD recorder / MD deck

OUT IN

DIGITAL

INPUT

R L

OUTPUT

FM (75Ω)GND AM

)

TV(1

VIDEO

LRL

)

INPUT 2(DVD

INPUT 1(TV

ANTENNA

COMPONENT

)

INPUT 2(DVD

)

DVD(2

VCR1(3

DIGITAL OUTDIGITAL OUT

DIGITAL IN

3421

VCR1INDVD SL

OUT

VIDEO

)

INPUT 3(VCR1

DSS/VCR2(4

INOUT

COAX.

OPT.

DSS/VCR2

)

OUT

RC-5 MULTI RC

OUT

MONITOR

OUT

YYY

)

INPUT 3(VCR1

)

INPUT 4(DSS/VCR2

MULTI

TV(1

OUT

DC OUT

OUT

TAPE

CD/CDR

OUT

AUDIO

OUTPUT 1 OUTPUT 2INPUT 1(TV

)

DVD(2

FLASHER

OUT

R L R L

OUT IN

LRL

L R

RL RL

INPUT 4(DSS/VCR2

)

IN OUT

RECEIVER

Tape Deck

L R

Analog Audio

)

VCR1(3

EMITTER

OUT

(

DSS/VCR2(4

IN OUT

RSR

LMULTI OUT

AUX2

OUT PUT

RS-23

OUT

PUT

HDMI Ver1.2

)

MONI. OUT

S-VIDEO

SBL

SLL

PRE OUT

SBR

SBL

7.1CH IN

SBR

)

Digital Audio (coaxial)

Digital Audio (optical)

L R

The output audio signal from the TAPE OUT jack and the CD/CD RECORDER OUT jack is the same signal which is currently selected.

Caution:

• Do not connect this unit and other components to mains power until all connections between components have been completed.

Notes:

• Insert all plugs and connectors securely. Incomplete connections may make noise.

• Be sure to connect the left and right channels properly.

Red connectors are for the R (right) channel, and

white connectors are for the L (left) channel.

• Be sure to connect input and output properly.

• Refer to the instructions for each component that is connected to this unit.

• Do not bind audio/video connection cables with power cords and speaker cables this will result in generating a hum or other noise.

CONNECTING DIGITAL AUDIO COMPONENTS

• There are 6 digital inputs, 3 coaxial jacks and 3 optical jacks, on the rear panel. You can use these jacks to input PCM, Dolby Digital and DTS bitstream signals from a CD, DVD, or other digital source components.

• There is one digital output coaxial jack and one optical output jack on the rear panel. These jacks can be connected to a CD recorder-, or a MD deck inputs, respectively.

• Refer to the instructions for each component. To setup the digital audio format of DVD player, or other digital source’s connected to digital input jacks.

• Use ﬁ ber optical cables (optical) for DIG-1,2,3 input jacks. Use 75 ohms coaxial cables (for digital audio or video) for DIG-4, 5, 6 input jacks.

• You can designate the input for each digital input/ output jacks according to your component. See page 24.

Notes:

• There is no Dolby Digital RF input jack. Use an external RF demodulator Dolby Digital decoder when connecting the Dolby Digital RF output jack of the videodisc player to the digital input jack.

• The digital signal jacks on the SR7001 conform to the EIA standard. If you use a cable that does not conform to this standard, the SR7001 may not function properly.

• Each type of audio jack works independently. Signals input through the digital and analog jacks are output through the corresponding digital and analog jacks, respectively.

HDMI JACK

OUTPUT 1

INPUT 4

(

DSS/VCR2

)

INPUT 2

(

DVD

)

HDMI Ver1.2

This SR7001 has four HDMI inputs and one HDMI output (The SR8001 has two HDMI outputs.). It can send digital video and audio signals from DVDs and other sources directly to a display. It minimizes signal degradation caused by analog conversion so that high quality images can be enjoyed. The SR7001 is also capable of converting analog video signals (Composite Video, S-Video, Component Video) for HDMI output. Select an input source from the OSD menu system. (See page 24, 35)

Notes:

• When the HDMI output is connected to a display monitor that does not support HDCP, signals are not output. To view images in HDMI, it is necessary to connect to a display that supports HDCP.

• There may be no image output if connected to a TV or display that is not compatible with the above format.

• Refer to the instruction manual of the TV or display to be connected to the SR7001 for detailed information regarding the HDMI terminal.

* HDCP: High-bandwidth Digital Content Protection

CONNECTING HDMI DEVICES

An HDMI cable (sold separately) is used to connect the HDMI jack on the SR7001 with the HDMI jack on a DVD player, TV, projector or other component. To transmit multichannel audio via HDMI, the connected player must support multichannel audio transmission through its HDMI jack. HDMI video streaming is compatible with DVI in principle. Therefore, it is possible to connect to a TV or monitor that has a DVI terminal using an HDMI-DVI conversion cable or plug. When connecting to a DVI terminal, connect the audio signal separately.

Notes:

• Some HDMI components can be controlled over the HDMI cable, but this receiver cannot control other components this way.

• When connected to a monitor (i.e., TV, projector, etc.) that does not support HDCP, video and audio are not output.

• DVI cables come with 24-pin and 29-pin plugs. This receiver supports 24-pin DVI-D cables; 29-pin DVI cables cannot connect to it.

• Some source devices such as DVD players or set top box do not support HDMI repeater operations like those of the SR7001. In such case, pictures are not properly projected on monitors such as TVs and projectors.

• When multiple components are connected to this receiver, turn power to unused components off to prevent interference between them.

• Disconnecting or connecting cables with the power on can damage the equipment. Turn the power off before disconnecting or connecting cables.

• Some DVD-Audio disks disable downmixing. These types of disks are not played back correctly unless the left, center, right and surround left and right speakers, and subwoofer are connected.

• If a DVD player that does not support HDMI 1.1 is connected to the SR7001, multi channel PCM playback is not possible even with DVD-Audio disks.

• If an Super Audio CD player that does not support HDMI 1.2 is connected to the receiver, DSD playback is not possible even with Super Audio CD.

(*DSD: Direct Stream Digital)

• If a DVD player or other device with DVI output is connected to the SR7001, a separate audio cable (optical-digital, coaxial digital or analog) is needed for the audio signals. In this case, select the connected audio input as explained in “1-1 FUNC INPUT SETUP”. (See page 24)

• Multi channel PCM signals and audio signals of 62 kHz or higher that are input from the HDMI jack are not output from the DIGITAL OUT jacks.

• Depending on the quiality of the cable used, the HDMI signal may be affected by noise.

FM (75Ω)GND AM

)

INPUT 2(DVD

INPUT 2

)

DVD(2

TV(1

VCR1(3

VIDEO

DIGITAL IN

35421

VCR1

DVD SL

SATELLITE TUNER

HDMI OUTPUT

DVD player VIDEO PROJECTOR

HDMI OUTPUT HDMI INPUT

)

INPUT 2(DVD

)

TV(1

DC OUT

ININ

)

OUTPUT 1 OUTPUT 2INPUT 1(TV

OUTPUT 1

)

FLASHER

INPUT 4(DSS/VCR2

)

DVD(2

OUT

RECEIVER

IN OUT

MULTI OUT

VCR1(3

)

HDMI

Ver1.2

)

DSS/VCR2(4

IN OUT

SLL

EMITTER

RSR

OUT

LTAPE CD/CDR

(

)

AUX2

ANTENNA

)

DIGITAL OUT

OUT

INPUT 1(TV

YYY

)

OUT

RC-5 MULTI RC

OUT

)

MONITOR

OUT

INPUT 3(VCR1

INPUT 4(DSS/VCR2

INPUT 4

MULTI

OUT

OUTIN

AUDIO

(

DSS/VCR2

COMPONENT

VIDEO

)

(

)

INPUT 3(VCR1

DVD

DSS/VCR2(4

INOUT

COAX.

OPT.

DSS/VCR2

ENGLISH

OFF

FRONT A OR B.CENTER.SURR. SURR BACK : MINIMUM 6 OHMS FRONT A + B : MINIMUM 8 OHMS

SPEAKER SYSTEMS

FRONT

CEN TER

SURR.

OUT PUT

OUT

PUT

MONI. OUT

S-VIDEO

SBL

SBR

SBL

SBR

MODEL NO. SR8001

RS-232C

AC IN

PRE OUT

7.1CH IN

SURROUND

BACK

MULTI SPEAKER

/SPEAKER C

SUB SPEAKER

AC OUTLET

230V 50/60Hz

SWITCHED

0.65A 150W

ENGLISH

OUT

AUDIO

OUT

VCR1

DVD

(

)

VCR1

(

)

OUT PUT

COMPONENT

VIDEO

INPUT 3

(

VCR1

)

S-VIDEO

OUT

DVD

(

)

VCR1

(

)

MONI. OUT

S-VIDEO

DSS/VCR2

(

)

MONI. OUT

VIDEO

MONITOR

OUT

DSS/VCR2

(

)

(

)

DIGITAL IN

DSS/VCR2

CONNECTING VIDEO COMPONENTS

DVD player

DIGITAL

OUT

AUDIO

OUT

L R

VIDEO

OUT

FM (75Ω)GND AM

)

DVD

TV(1

VIDEO

DIGITAL IN

DVD

L R L R LR

AUDIO

ANTENNA

)

INPUT 2(DVD

(

)

(

)

VCR1

ININOUT

DIGITAL OUT

3541

VCR1

OUT

L LR R

AUDIO

OUT

COMPONENT

VIDEO

)

INPUT 3(VCR1

DSS/VCR2(4

OUT

RC-5MULTI RC

COAX.

OPT.

DSS/VCR2TV

OUT

VIDEO OUT

/ PBCR

INPUT 1(TV

INPUT 3

)

INPUT 4(DSS/VCR2

)

MONITOR

MULTI

OUT

OUTIN

AUDIO

/ PR

)

(

VCR1

DC OUT

VIDEO

OUT IN

)

TV(1

ININ

S-VIDEO

OUT

INPUT 2(DVD

INPUT 4(DSS/VCR2

OUTPUT 1 OUTPUT 2INPUT 1(TV

(

)

DVD

FLASHER

OUT

RECEIVER

)

VCR1

ININOUT

MULTI OUT

)

(

)

EMITTER

OUT

S-VIDEO OUT IN

(

DSS/VCR2(4

IN OUT

RSR

LTAPE CD/CDR

AUX2

COMPONENT

HDMI

Ver1.2

)

MONI. OUT

SBL

SLL

SBR

SBL

SBR

)

VIDEO IN

/ PBCR

OUT PUT

S-VIDEO

OUT

7.1CH

VIDEO, S-VIDEO, COMPONENT JACKS

There are 3 types of video jacks on the rear panel.

VIDEO

PROJECTOR

DIGITAL

OUT

S-VIDEO

/ PR

Satellite Tuner

AUDIO

OUT

VIDEO

OUT

S-VIDEO

OUT

SURROUND

MODEL NO. SR8001

RS-232C

PRE

BACK

AC OUTLET

230V 50/60Hz

SWITCHED

0.65A 150W

MULTI SPEAKER

SUB SPEAKER

/SPEAKER C

FM (75Ω)GND AM

VIDEO

AC IN

VCR

L R

)

INPUT 1(TV

ANTENNA

COMPONENT

)

INPUT 2(DVD

)

(

)

DVD(2

VCR1(3

DSS/VCR2

OUT

DIGITAL OUT

DIGITAL IN

COAX.

3521

OPT.

DSS/VCR2

VCR1INDVD SL

OUT OUT

VIDEO

INPUT 3(VCR1

(

)

OUT

RC-5 MULTI RC

OUT

)

MONITOR

OUT

YYY

INPUT 3(VCR1

INPUT 4(DSS/VCR2

MULTI

TV(1

OUT

DC OUT

OUT

OUTIN

AUDIO

INPUT 2(DVD

)

OUTPUT 1 OUTPUT 2INPUT 1(TV

)

DVD(2)VCR1(3

FLASHER

INPUT 4(DSS/VCR2

RECEIVER

MULTI OUT

)

OUT PUT

RS-232

DSS/VCR2

RSR

LTAPE CD/CDR

)

OUT

PUT

HDMI

Ver1.2

(

)

MONI. OUT

S-VIDEO

OUTIN OUT

SLL

SBL

PRE OUT

SBR

SBL

7.1CH IN

SBR

)

EMITTER

OUT

(

AUX2

Video

S-Video

L R

AUDIO

OUT

VIDEO

OUT

VIDEO

S-VIDEO

Analog Audio

Digital Audio (coaxial)

Digital Audio (optical)

L R

VIDEO jack

The video signal for the VIDEO jacks is the conventional composite video signal.

S-VIDEO jack

The video signal is separated into luminance (Y) and color (C) signals for the S-VIDEO jack. The S-VIDEO signals enables high-quality color reproduction. If your video component has an S-VIDEO output, we recommend to use it. Connect the S-VIDEO output jack on your video component to the S-VIDEO input jack on the SR7001.

Component jack

Make component video connections to a TV or monitor with component inputs to produce higher quality video images. Use a component video cable or 3 video cords to connect the component video out jacks on the SR7001 to the monitor.

Notes:

Be sure to connect the left and right audio channels

• properly.

Red connectors are for the R (right) channel, and

white connectors are the for L (left) channel.

• Be sure to connect the inputs and outputs of the video signals properly.

•

If you connect the S-VIDEO or component signal to the S-VIDEO or component jack on the SR7001, it is not necessary to connect the conventional video signal to the VIDEO (composite) jack. If you use both video inputs, the SR7001 gives priority to the S-VIDEO signal.

• Each type of video jack works independently. Signals input to the VIDEO (composite) and SVIDEO jacks or component are output to the corresponding VIDEO (composite) and S-VIDEO or component jacks, respectively.

he SR7001

•

has the “TV-AUTO ON/OFF” function to turn the TV ON or OFF automatically, by sensing the incoming video signal from the VIDEO jacks.

• You may need to setup the digital audio output format of your DVD player, or other digital source components. Refer to the instructions of the each component connected to the digital input jacks.

• There is no Dolby Digital RF input jack. Use an external RF demodulator Dolby Digital decoder when connecting the Dolby Digital RF output jack of the videodisc player to the digital input jack.

• The COMPONENT OUTPUT 1 and 2 terminals of the SR7001 can output the same video signal. Moreover, the OUTPUT 2 terminal of the SR8001 can output video signals for multi room playback. (See page 34)

SBR

SBL

SBR

SBL

PRE OUT

7.1CH IN

(

AUX2

)

ADVANCED CONNECTING

OUT

RC-5

DVD Audio player

Super Audio CD

Multi channel player

SURR. BACK

CENTER

SUB

WOOFER

FRONT SURR.

RL RLRL

T 1(TV

T 3(VCR1

4(DSS/VCR2

ULTI

OUT

)

INPUT 2(DVD

)

OUTPUT 1 OUTPUT 2

)

TV(1

DC OUT

FLASHER

CD/CDR

INPUT 4(DSS/VCR2

)

DVD(2

OUT

RECEIVER

)

IN OUT

MULTI OUT

CONNECTING THE REMOTE CONTROL JACKS

)

INPUT 2(DVD

)

OUTPUT 1 OUTPUT 2INPUT 1(TV

)

TV(1

DC OUTDIGITAL IN

FLASHER

ININ

REMOTE

CONTROL

OUT

INPUT 4(DSS/VCR2

DVD(2

OUT

)

DSS/VCR2(4

VCR1(3

IN OUT

RECEIVER

EMITTER

OUT

MULTI OUT

(

AUX2

HDMI Ver1.2

IN OUT

RSR

LTAPE CD/CDR

)

SLL

O P

)

MONI. OU

S-VID

SBL

SBR

SBL

SBR

DVD player

ENGLISH

RC OUT

OPTION

REMOTE

CONTROL

CD player

OUT

EXTERNAL INTERNAL

INPUT 1(TV

LR LR

OUT PUT

IN OUT

RSR

RRSR

)

OUT

PUT

HDMI Ver1.2

)

MONI. OUT

S-VIDEO

SLL

SLSLL

SBL

SBR

SBL

SBR

)

DSS/VCR2(4

VCR1(3

EMITTER

OUT

(

AUX2

MODEL N

RS-232C

R L

CENTER

Power

Amplifer

FRONT SURR.

PRE

OUT

7.1CH

Subwoofer

SURR. BACK

SUB

WOOFER

REMOTE CONTROL

RL RL RL

Center

Surround

Front Right

Right

OUT

Front Left

Surround Left

FM (75Ω)GND AM

TV(1

VIDEO

ANTENNA

COMPONENT

)

INPUT 2(DVD

)

DVD(2

DVD SL

DSS/VCR2(4

VCR1(3

INOUT

DIGITAL OUT

COAX.

35421

OPT.

DSS/VCR2

VCR1

OUT

VIDEO

INPUT 3(VCR1

OUT

RC-5 MULTI RC

RC-5

OUT

YYY

INPUT 3(VCR1

)

INPUT 4(DSS/VCR2

)

MONITOR

OUT

AUDIO

MULTI

OUT

OUTIN

CD recorder

EXTERNAL INTERNAL

CONNECTING MULTI CHANNEL AUDIO SOURCE

The 7.1CH INPUT jacks are for multichannel audio source such as a Super Audio CD multichannel player, DVD audio player or external decoder. If you use these jacks, switch on the 7.1CH INPUT and set the 7.1CH INPUT level by using the SETUP MAIN MENU. See page24.

Surround Back Left

CONNECTING AN EXTERNAL POWER AMPLIFIER

The PREOUT jacks are for connecting external power ampliﬁ ers. Be sure to connect each speaker to the corresponding external power ampliﬁ er.

Surround Back Right

You can control other Marantz products through the SR7001 with the remote control by connecting the REMOTE CONTROL terminals on each unit. The signal transmitted from the remote control is received by the remote sensor on the SR7001. Then the signal is sent to the connected device through this terminal. Therefore you need to aim the remote control only at the SR7001. Also, if a Marantz power ampliﬁ er (some models excluded) is connected to one of these terminals, the power ampliﬁ er’s, power switch is synchronized with this unit’s power switch.

Set the REMOTE CONTROL SWITCH on the other units, (not the SR7001) to “EXT.” (external) to use this feature.

Whenever external infrared sensors or similar devices are connected to RC-5 IN of the SR7001, be sure to always disable operation of the infrared sensor on the main unit by using the following procedure.

1. Hold down the MULTI button and the MENU button on the front panel at the same time for ﬁ ve seconds.

The setting “IR=ENABLE” is shown on the FL

DISPLAY.

Press the CURSOR buttons (1, 2) to change

this to “IR=DISABLE”.

Press the ENTER button. Once this setting is

made, the infrared sensor on the main unit is disabled.

Note:

• Be sure to set to “IR=ENABLE” when external infrared sensors or similar devices are not connected. Otherwise, the main unit will be unable to receive remote control commands.

To restore the original setting, perform steps 1

to 4 to set to “IR=ENABLE”.

ENGLISH

(

Ω

)

GNDAMAM

ANTENNA

))

GNDGND AMAM

ANTANTENN

CONNECTING THE ANTENNA TERMINALS

FM Antenna

FM External

Antenna

AM Loop

Antenna

AM External

Antenna

CONNECTING THE SUPPLIED ANTENNAS

Connecting the supplied FM antenna

The supplied FM antenna is for indoor use only. During use, extend the antenna and move it in various directions until the clearest signal is received. Fix it with push pins or similar implements in the position that will cause the least amount of distortion. If you experience poor reception quality, an outdoor antenna may improve the quality.

)

INPUT 1(TV

(

)

ANTENNA

FM (75Ω)GND AM

TV(1

VIDEO

ANTENNA

7575Ω

GND

COMPONENT

)

INPUT 2(DVD

)

DVD(2

DIGITAL IN

DVD SL

DSS/VCR2(4

VCR1(3

INOUT

DIGITAL OUT

COAX.

35421

OPT.

DSS/VCR2

VCR1

OUT

VIDEO

INPUT 3(VCR1

)

OUT

RC-5 MULTI RC

OUT

MONITOR

YYY

INPUT 3(VCR1

)

INPUT 4(DSS/VCR2

MULTI

OUT

OUTIN

AUDIO

)

INPUT 2(DVD

)

TV(1

DC OUT

ININ

)

OUTPUT 1 OUTPUT 2INPUT 1(TV

)

FLASHER

INPUT 4(DSS/VCR2

)

DVD(2

OUT

RECEIVER

IN OUT

MULTI OUT

VCR1(3

)

EMITTER

OUT

ASSEMBLING THE AM LOOP ANTENNA

Release the vinyl tie and take out the connection line.

2. Bend the base part in the reverse direction.

3. Insert the hook at the bottom of the loop part into the slot at the base part.

Connecting the supplied AM loop antenna

The supplied AM loop antenna is for indoor use only. Set it in the direction and position it to where you receive the clearest sound. Put it as far away as possible from the unit, televisions, speaker cables, and power cords. If you experience poor reception quality, an outdoor antenna may improve the quality.

Press and hold down the lever of the AM antenna

terminal.

2. Insert the bare wire into the antenna terminal. Release the lever.

OFF

FRONT A OR B.CENTER.SURR. SURR BACK : MINIMUM 6 OHMS FRONT A + B : MINIMUM 8 OHMS

SPEAKER SYSTEMS

FRONT

CEN TER

SURR.

OUT PUT

OUT

)

DSS/VCR2(4

IN OUT

RSR

LTAPE CD/CDR

(

AUX2

PUT

HDMI

Ver1.2

)

MONI. OUT

S-VIDEO

SLL

SBL

SBR

SBL

SBR

)

MODEL NO. SR8001

RS-232C

AC IN

PRE OUT

7.1CH IN

SURROUND

BACK

MULTI SPEAKER

/SPEAKER C

SUB SPEAKER

AC OUTLET

230V 50/60Hz

SWITCHED

0.65A 150W

Note:

• Connect the shielded grounding wire (black) to the AM antenna GND terminal.

Place the antenna on stable surface.

CONNECTING AN FM OUTDOOR ANTENNA

Notes:

• Keep the antenna away from noise sources (neon signs, busy roads, etc.).

• Do not put the antenna close to power lines. Keep it well away from power lines, transformers, etc.

• To avoid the risk of lightning and electrical shock, grounding is necessary.

CONNECTING AN AM OUTDOOR ANTENNA

An outdoor antenna will be more effective if it is stretched horizontally above a window or outside.

Notes:

• Do not remove the AM loop antenna.

• To avoid the risk of lightning and electrical shock, grounding is necessary.

MULTI SPEAKER

/SPEAKER C

SUB SPEAKER

OUT

VIDEO

MULTI RC

MULTI

OUT

MULTI OUT

AUDIO

OFF

SPEAKER SYSTEMS

SURROUND

BACK

MULTI SPEAKER

/SPEAKER C

SUB SPEAKER

FRONT

OFF

CONNECTING FOR THE MULTI ROOM

)

INPUT 1(TV

INPUT 2(DVD

ANTENNA

COMPONENT

)

INPUT 2(DVD

)

DVD(2

DIGITAL IN

DVD SL

DSS/VCR2(4

VCR1(3

IN INOUT

DIGITAL OUT

35421

VCR1

OUT

MULTIROOM B

VIDEO

COAX.

OPT.

DSS/VCR2TV

INPUT 3(VCR1

)

MONITOR

OUT

RC-5

MULTI RC

YYY

)

INPUT 3(VCR1

)

INPUT 4(DSS/VCR2

MULTI

TV(1

OUT

DC OUT

OUT

OUTINROUT

ININ

AUDIO

INPUT 4(DSS/VCR2

)

OUTPUT 1 OUTPUT 2INPUT 1(TV

)

DVD(2

FLASHER

OUT

L R LR

FM (75Ω)GND AM

TV(1

VIDEO

CONNECTING FOR SPEAKER C USE

Bi-wire Connection

A bi-wire connection is possible with speakers that have two sets of inputs (for treble and bass).

(Multi room speaker)

RIGHT

SPEAKER

LEFT

SPEAKER

This allows you to drive the treble and bass units with separate channel amps, which enables better sound quality. Connect the speakers as shown in the ﬁ gure. Set the SPEAKER C selector switch on the rear panel to ON.

Notes:

• If incorrectly connected, a protective circuit in the receiver will trip and set the receiver to standby.

)

DSS/VCR2(4

VCR1(3

IN OUT

RECEIVER

EMITTER

OUT

MULTI OUT

AAB

(

AUX2

IN OUT

RSR

LTAPE CD/CDR

)

OUT PUT

OUT

PUT

HDMI Ver1.2

)

MONI. OUT

S-VIDEO

SLL

SBL

SBR

SBL

SBR

PRE OUT

7.1CH IN

MODEL NO. SR8001

RS-232C

AC IN

SURROUND

BACK

MULTI SPEAKER

/SPEAKER C

SUB SPEAKER

AC OUTLET

230V 50/60Hz

SWITCHED

0.65A 150W

OFF

FRONT A OR B.CENTER.SURR. SURR BACK : MINIMUM 6 OHMS FRONT A + B : MINIMUM 8 OHMS

SPEAKER SYSTEMS

FRONT

CEN TER

SURR.

MULTIROOM

LEFT

SPEAKER

MULTIROOM

RIGHT

SPEAKER

R L

L R

FRONTRC IN

MAIN AMP

(For multiroom)

IR RECEIVER

R L

FRONT

L R

RC OUT

VIDEO

MONITOR

(The STANDBY indicator will ﬂ ash.) In such case, recheck the connections between the speakers and the receiver.

• Turn power to the receiver off before changing the setting of the SPEAKER C selector switch.

• If the speaker is ﬁ tted with a shorting bar, remove the shorting bar.

SPEAKER

OFF

FRONT A OR B.CENTER.SURR. SURR BACK : MINIMUM 6 OHMS FRONT A + B : MINIMUM 8 OHMS

OFF

SPEAKER

SYSTEMS

FRONT

CEN TER

SURR.

LEFT

SPEAKER

DEL NO. SR8001

AC IN

SPEAKER

RIGHT

SURROUND

BACK

MULTI SPEAKER

/SPEAKER C

SUB SPEAKER

AC OUTLET

230V 50/60Hz

SWITCHED

0.65A 150W

Note:

• You can use surround back speaker terminals as MULTI SPK. terminals or SPEAKER C terminal when you are not using surround back speakers.

ENGLISH

FLASHER

RECEIVER

EMITTER

OUT

DC OUT

RS-232C

CONNECTING OTHER EQUIPMENT

PONENT IDEO

INPUT 3(VCR1

/VCR2(4

OUT

RC-5 MULTI RC

S/VCR2

OUT

)

INPUT 1(TV

YYY

INPUT 3(VCR1

)

INPUT 4(DSS/VCR2

MONITOR

MULTI

OUT

DC OUT

OUT

OUTIN

AUDIO

)

TV(1

INPUT 2(DVD

)

INPUT 4(DSS/VCR2

)

OUTPUT 1 OUTPUT 2

)

DVD(2

FLASHER

OUT

RECEIVER

)

VCR1(3

IN OUT

MULTI OUT

EMITTER

)

OUT

(

DSS/VCR2(4

IN OUT

RSR

LTAPE CD/CDR

AUX2

HDMI Ver1.2

)

MONI. OUT

S-VIDEO

SLL

SBL

SBR

SBL

SBR

)

gsaf d

a RS232C

Connect an external control device or other device for servicing. (Use a straight cable for the connection.)

s DC OUT (DC TRIGGER)

External devices can be controlled from the SR7001 by connecting them to the DC OUT terminal (12 V).

d EMITTER OUT (SR8001 Only)

Outputs the remote control signal input to the IR RECEIVER IN terminals. External components can be controlled by connecting them to the EMITTER OUT terminal.

f FLASHER IN

This receiver can be controlled by connecting a control box or other control device to this receiver.

MULTI SPEAKER

SUB SPEAKER

AC OUTLET

230V 50/60Hz

SWITCHED

0.65A 150W

SURROUND

/SPEAKER C

BACK

OFF

OUT PUT

7.1CH

MODEL NO. SR8001

RS-232C

AC IN

PRE OUT

g IR RECEIVER IN (SR8001 Only)

This receiver can be operated by remote control without using the internal IR receiver, by connecting an external IR receiver.

GND

+12V

Signal

An IR receiver is connected as shown above.

Caution:

• Wrongly connecting an IR receiver or connecting an IR receiver of the wrong voltage can damage the SR7001, therefore do not do this.

• 50 mA of current are supplied to the device connected to the IR RECEIVER IN terminal.

• Connecting a device that requires more than 50 mA of current to this receiver will damage this receiver. Before using other devices, carefully check the speciﬁ cations of those devices.

SETUP

MULTI

AMP

AUX2

AUX1

TAPE

TUNER

CD-R

LIGHT

Learning Remote Controller

RC8500SR

After all components are connected, initial setup must be performed.

ONSCREEN DISPLAY MENU SYSTEM

The SR7001 incorporates an onscreen menu system, which makes various operations possible by using the cursor (3, 4, 1 , 2) and OK/ENTER buttons on the remote control unit or on the front panel.

Note:

To view the onscreen displays, make certain you

• have connected the MONITOR OUT jack on the rear panel to the composite, S-Video, component video or HDMI input of your TV or projector. (See page 15, 16)

1. Press the AMP button on the remote control unit. (This step is not needed when operating the setup menus from the SR7001.)

Press the MENU button on the remote control

or press the MENU button on the front panel. The “MAIN MENU” of the OSD menu system is displayed.

There are 6 items in the MAIN MENU.

Select the desired sub-menu with the 3

4 cursor buttons and press the OK/ENTER button. The display will change to the selected sub-menu.

Notes:

• If you desire to adjust any sub-menu, you need to set it to UNLOCKED.

• To lock sub-menus, set items 1-6 on the MAIN MENU to “LOCKED”.

(1) Move the cursor to “1. INPUT SETUP” in the

MAIN MENU.

(2) Select the “0” mark left of “LOCKED” with the 1

or 2 cursor buttons.

To exit from OSD menu system, press the

EXITbutton, or move the cursor to EXIT and press the OK/ENTER button.

Note:

• Settings are entered with the ENTER button on the unit or the OK button on the remote control unit. When using the remote control unit, use the OK button as if it were the ENTER button.

RC8001SR BUTTON CONTROL

LEFT button

OK button

MENU button

Press this button to display

the OSD menu system.

SR7001 FRONT BUTTON CONTROL

AUTO

THX

LEFT button

MENU button

Press this button to display the

OSD menu system.

TEST

LIP·SYNC

GUIDE

CH.SEL

VOL

MUTE

EXIT

SURR

2 31

7.1CH

ATT

SPK-AB

UP button

ENTER

BAND

DISPLAY

EXIT

SPEAKER

MULTI T-MODE

7.1CH INPUT

DOWN button

UP button

RIGHT button

DOWN button

EXIT button

Press this button to exit the OSD menu system.

ENTER button

MEMORY

MultEQ

RIGHT button

MIC

EXIT button

Press this button to exit the OSD menu system.

ENGLISH

AMP (Ampliﬁ er) button

ENGLISH

Note:

• After you complete this portion of the setup, move

cursor to “RETURN” with the 3, 4, 1 and 2 cursor buttons and press the OK/ENTER button.

MAIN MENU

1.INPUT SETUP

2.SPKR SETUP

3.SURR SETUP LOCKED

4.VIDEO SETUP

5.PREFERENCE UNLOCK

6.ACOUSTIC EQ

1.INPUT SETUP

FUNC INPUT SETUP

7.1CH INPUT SETUP

FUNCTION RENAME

RETURN NEXT EXIT

“1. INPUT SETUP” (P. 23)

2.SPKR SETUP

AUTO SETUP MANUAL SETUP

THX AUDIO SETUP

RETURN NEXT EXIT

3.SURR SETUP

CHANNEL LEVEL PL x MUSIC PARAMETER CS PARAMETER NEO:6 PARAMETER

RE-EQ : OFF LFE LEVEL : -10dB

RETURN NEXT EXIT

“3. SURROUND SETUP” (P. 32)

4.VIDEO SETUP

VIDEO CONVERT

TV.AUTO :DISABLE OSD INFO :ENABLE I/P CONVERT :DISABLE HDMI OUT :OUTPUT1 COMPO OUT2 :MAIN

SUB MENU

5.PREFERENCE

MULTI ROOM SETUP A B

DC TRIGGER SETUP 1 2

STANDBY : NORMAL BILINGUAL : MAIN+SUB HDMI AUDIO: THROUGH

RETURN NEXT EXIT

“5. PREFERENCE” (P. 35)

Note:

• The SR7001 does not have “MULTI ROOM SETUP” A and B selection options.

6.ACOUSTIC EQ.

EQ.MODE : OFF

PRESET G.EQ ADJ CHECK AUTO

RETURN NEXT EXIT

“2. SPEAKER SETUP” (P. 26)

RETURN NEXT EXIT

“4. VIDEO SETUP” (P. 34)

Note:

• The SR7001 does not have the “HDMI OUT” and “COMPO OUT 2” sub-menus.

RETURN NEXT EXIT

“6. ACOUSTIC EQ” (P. 37)

1 INPUT SETUP

This menu is for setting the matching the output of connected audio devices and the input jacks of this receiver.

1.INPUT SETUP

FUNC INPUT SETUP

7.1CH INPUT SETUP

FUNCTION RENAME

ENGLISH

•

FUNC INPUT SETUP :

“1-1 FUNC INPUT SETUP” (see page 24)

•

7.1 CH INPUT SETUP :

“1-2 7.1 CH INPUT SETUP” (see page 24)

•

FUNC RENAME :

“1-3 FUNCTION RENAME” (see page 25)

Select “1. INPUT SETUP” from the MAIN

MENU with 3

4 cursor button, and press the

OK/ENTER button.

1.INPUT SETUP

FUNC INPUT SETUP

7.1CH INPUT SETUP

FUNCTION RENAME

RETURN NEXT EXIT

2. Select the desired sub-menu with the 3

4 cursor buttons, and press the OK/ENTER button.

P. 24

☞

FUNC INPUT SETUP 1 FUNC:MODE DIG HDMI COMP V/S

TV :AUTO 1 1 1 1 DVD :AUTO 2 2 2 2 VCR1 :AUTO 3 3 3 3 DSS :AUTO 4 4 4 4 AUX1 :AUTO F - -

RETURN NEXTT EXIT

FUNC INPUT SETUP 2 FUNC:MODE DIG HDMI C0MP V/S

TAPE:ANA - - - 1 CD/R:AUTO 5 - - 2 AUX2:ANA - - - 3

RETURN BACK EXIT

RETURN NEXT EXIT

P. 24

☞

7.1CH INPUT SETUP VIDEO-IN : LAST FRONT L : 0dB CENTER : 0dB FRONT R : 0dB SURR.R : 0dB SURR.B R : 0dB SURR.B L : 0dB SURR. L : 0dB SUB W : 0dB

RETURN NEXT EXIT

P. 25

☞

FUNCTION RENAME

FUNCTION: TV RENAME : TV________

ABCDEFGHIJKLMNOPQRSTUV WXYZabcdefghijklmnopqr stuvwxyz0123456789!"#$ %&’()*+,../:;<=>? _{|}SPACE BACK DEFAULT

RETURN NEXT EXIT

ENGLISH

1-1 FUNC INPUT SETUP (ASSIGNABLE DIGITAL INPUT)

The 6 and F (Front) digital inputs can be assigned to a desired source. HDMI and COMPONENT inputs can be assigned to the preferred source. Use this menu to select which digital input jacks are to be assigned to which input source.

Select “FUNC INPUT SETUP” from the

1.INPUT SETUP menu with the 3 buttons and press the OK/ENTER button.

FUNC INPUT SETUP 1 FUNC:MODE DIG HDMI COMP V/S

TV :AUTO 1 1 1 1 DVD :AUTO 2 2 2 2 VCR1 :AUTO 3 3 3 3 DSS :AUTO 4 4 4 4 AUX1 :AUTO F - -

RETURN NEXTT EXIT

2. Select a setting with the 3, 4, 1, and 2 cursor buttons, and assign a mode and input jack (DIG, HDMI, COMP, V/S).

MODE

AUTO:

Select “AUTO”, for automatic detection of the digital input signal condition. If there is no digital signal, but there is an analog signal present, the analog signal will be played. "AUTO" is the initial setting of all input sources.

HDMI:

Select “HDMI” used

DIG:

Select “DIG”, when only a digital signal will be used.

ANA:

Select “ANA” for input sources for which no digital input jacks are used.

DIG

6 and F(Front) digital inputs can be assigned to a desired source. Assign the number of a digital input jack to the device.

, when only a HDMI signal will be

4 cursor

HDMI

Assign the number of an HDMI input jack to the device.

Note:

• When FUNCTION MODE is set to HDMI and HDMI AUDIO of “5. PREFERENCE” is set to THROUGH, audio is not output from the SR7001. (See page 35)

COMP

Assign the number of a component video input jack to the device.

V/S

Assign the number of a composite video and Svideo input jack to the device.

Note:

• Video and S-video can use the same numbers when assigning to input functions.

• The ✽ mark in AUX.1 indicates that other inputs cannot be assigned.

Press the OK/ENTER button.

Select each mode setting and input terminal

with the 1

Press the OK/ENTER button.

Repeat steps 2-5 until all items are set.

After you complete this portion of the setup,

move the cursor to “NEXT” with the 3, 4, 1, and 2 cursor buttons and then press the OK/ ENTER button to go to the next page.

Repeat steps 2-5 until all items are set.

After you complete this portion of the setup,

move the cursor to “RETURN” with 3, 4,

1, and 2 cursor buttons and press the OK/ ENTER button.

To return to the Func Input Setup 1 menu from

the Func Input Setup 2 menu, move the cursor to “BACK” with the 3, 4 , 1, and 2 cursor buttons and press the OK/ENTER button.

Note:

• Assignments cannot be made in sections with a ✽ mark.

2 cursor buttons.

FUNC INPUT SETUP 2 FUNC:MODE DIG HDMI C0MP V/S

TAPE:ANA - - - 1 CD/R:AUTO 5 - - 2 AUX2:ANA - - - 3

RETURN BACK EXIT

1-2 7.1 CH INPUT SETUP

This menu is for adjusting the speaker levels for 7.1channel input sources. Here you will adjust the volume for each channel so that they are all heard by the listener at the same level.

1. Select “7.1 CH INPUT SETUP” from the

1.INPUT SETUP menu with the 3 buttons and press the OK/ENTER button.

7.1CH INPUT SETUP VIDEO-IN : LAST FRONT L : 0dB CENTER : 0dB FRONT R : 0dB SURR.R : 0dB SURR.B R : 0dB SURR.B L : 0dB SURR. L : 0dB SUB W : 0dB

RETURN NEXT EXIT

Select “VIDEO-IN” with the 3

buttons.

Using the 1

video input source to be played through the MONITOR OUT jack.

The input source is switched by pressing the

LAST ↔ TV ↔ DVD ↔ VCR1 ↔ DSS ↔

AUX1 ↔ V-OFF ↔ LAST ↔...

Notes:

•

When “LAST” is selected, the source is set to the source selected before the 7.1 ch input menu was activated.

• When MONITOR OUT jack.

2 cursor buttons, select the

2 cursor buttons as follows;

“

V-OFF

” is selected,

no signal is emitted from

4 cursor

Select desired channel with the 3

buttons.

Using the 1

volume level of each channel.

Move the cursor to “RETURN” with the 3, 4, 1, and 2 cursor buttons, and press the OK/ENTER button to go to the 1.INPUT SETUP menu.

Note:

• The volume level can be set between -12 dB and +12 dB in 1 dB increments on all channels except the subwoofer (SUB W), which can be set from -18dB to +12 dB in 1 dB increments.

2 cursor buttons, adjust the

4 cursor

1-3 FUNCTION RENAME

Input sources can be registered under any name. This menu is for renaming input source. This menu is for renaming function name. Names can be up to 10 characters long, including spaces. (Characters are selected from those appearing on the display.) This name appears on the receiver's FL display and the OSD, but it does not appear in the OSD Setup menu.

Select “FUNCTION RENAME” from the 1.

INPUT SETUP menu with the 3 buttons and press the OK/ENTER button.

FUNCTION RENAME

FUNCTION: TV RENAME : TV________

ABCDEFGHIJKLMNOPQRSTUV WXYZabcdefghijklmnopqr stuvwxyz0123456789!"#$ %&’()*+,../:;<=>? _{|}SPACE BACK DEFAULT

RETURN NEXT EXIT

4 cursor

Repeat steps 5-8 until the new name is input.

BACK:

Deletes the character left of the cursor in the “RENAME” area one character at a time.

DEFAULT:

Restores the name in the “RENAME” area to the name in the “FUNCTION” area.

SPACE:

Inserts a space at the cursor point of the “RENAME” area.

Note:

• RENAME cannot be left blank.

Move the cursor to “RETURN” with the 3, 4, 1, and 2 cursor buttons and press the OK/ENTER button to

go to the 1. INPUT SETUP menu.

ENGLISH

2. Select “FUNCTION” with the 3 buttons.

Select an input source with the 1

buttons.

Select “RENAME” with the 3

buttons.

Move the cursor to the character (1st to 10th) to

change with the 1

Move the cursor to the character list with the 4

cursor button. (Move the cursor to the letter “A” to begin with.)

Select a character with the 3, 4, 1, and 2

cursor buttons.

Press the OK/ENTER button to enter the

selected letter.

2 cursor buttons.

4 cursor

2 cursor

ENGLISH

2 SPKR (SPEAKER) SETUP

After you have installed the SR7001 connected all the components and determined the speaker layout, it is now time to perform the settings in the Speaker Setup menu for the optimum sound acoustics for your environment and speaker layout. Before you perform the following settings, it is important that you first determine the following characteristics:

•

AUTO SETUP:

“2-1 AUTO SETUP (MultEQ Setup)”

(see page 27)

•

MANUAL SETUP:

“2-2 MANUAL SETUP”

•

THX AUDIO SETUP:

“2-3 THX AUDIO SETUP”

Select “2.SPKR SETUP” from the MAIN MENU

with 3

4 cursor buttons and press the OK/

(see page 30)

(see page 31)

ENTER button.

2.SPKR SETUP

AUTO SETUP MANUAL SETUP

THX AUDIO SETUP

P. 27

☞

AUTO SETUP

AUTO SETUP: START

MAIN ROOM SURR BACK: 2CH

RETURN EXIT

AUTO SETUP

SPEAKERS CHECK:--

NOW ANALYZING !!

CANCEL

EXIT

2.SPKR SETUP

AUTO SETUP MANUAL SETUP

THX AUDIO SETUP

RETURN EXIT

AUTO SETUP

NOW ANALYZING!!

CANCEL

AUTO SETUP

______________

NOW CALCULATE !!

P. 30

☞

SPEAKER SIZE THX SPKR : NO SUB W : YES FRONT : SMALL CENTER : SMALL SURR. : SMALL SURR.B : 2CH SURR.B SIZE : SMALL LPF/HPF : 80Hz BASS MIX :

RETURN NEXT EXIT

SPEAKER DISTANCE UNIT : m FRONT L : 3.05 m CENTER : 3.05 m FRONT R : 3.05 m SURR.R : 3.05 m SURR.B R : 3.05 m SURR.B L : 3.05 m SURR.L : 3.05 m SUB W : 3.05 m

RETURN BACK NEXT EXIT

P. 31

☞

THX AUDIO SETUP

ADVANCED SPKR ARRAY SURR.B SPKR :TOGETHER

RETURN EXIT

2. Select the desired menu with the 3

buttons, and press the OK/ENTER button.

Note:

• After you complete this the portion of the setup, press the OK/ENTER button. The cursor will move to “RETURN” and press the OK/ENTER button to go to the Sub-menu.

4 cursor

AUTO SETUP

SPEAKERS CHECK:OK

1ST MIC POSITION!! START CHECK

EXIT

CHECK RESULT

SPEAKER CONFIG SPEAKER SIZE DISTANCE CHANNEL LEVEL CROSSOVER FREQ

STORE

EXIT

SPEAKER LEVEL TEST MODE : MANUAL FRONT L : 0.0dB CENTER : 0.0dB FRONT R : 0.0dB SURR.R : 0.0dB SURR.B R : 0.0dB SURR.B L : 0.0dB SURR.L : 0.0dB SUB W : 0.0dB

RETURN BACK EXIT

2-1 AUTO SETUP (MultEQ™ SETUP)

The AUTO SETUP (MultEQ™ Setup) feature of the SR7001 measures sound characteristics of the speaker system and room where the receiver is used and automatically optimizes settings.

The Audyssey MultEQ™ technology adopted by the SR7001 provides the best listening environment for multiple listeners. To do this, the AUTO SETUP feature measures a test tone emitted by each channel in a maximum of 6 listening positions, using the supplied microphone. The measurement results are analyzed using an original algorithm and environmental settings are made to improve the sound characteristics of the listening area. To set up the speaker system (i.e., adjusting speaker distance, etc.) without using the AUTO SETUP feature, see “MANUAL SETUP” on page 30 of the manual.

HOW TO PERFORM AUTO SETUP

During measurement, the OSD menu displays the condition, therefore turn power to the monitor on.

Connect the supplied microphone to the MIC

jack on the SR7001.

AV SURROUND RECEIVER SR7500

INPUT SELECTOR

STANDBY

POWER ON/OFF PHONES

Set the microphone in the listening position.

DISP MULTI AUTO TUNED ST SPKR A B V-OFF

SURR DIRECT

AUTO

SLEEP

SURROUND

PEAK ANALOG

ATT

DIGITAL

NIGHT

DISC 6.1 MTX 6.1

LCR

LFE

AAC

PCM

SL S SR

ENTER

Notes:

• Measurement can be done in a maximum of 6 listening positions.

For the ﬁ rst measurement, set the microphone in the

main listening position.

VOLUME

DOWN

AUX 1 INPUT

AUDIOS-VIDEODIGITAL VIDEO L R

• Use a stand or tripod to position the microphone at ear height in the listening position.

• Remove any obstructions between the speakers and microphone.

• To use the internal subwoofer of the amp, set the volume to the middle point and set the crossover frequency to the highest.

• During measurement, step away from the microphone and operate the SR7001 via the remote control unit from a position that is out of the path of the speaker sound.

• The test tone output from the speakers during measurement is loud. Be mindful of neighbors and watch out for small children.

Either press the MultEQ™ button on the

front panel of the SR7001 or select “2. SPKR SETUP” from the MAIN MENU, select “AUTO SETUP” with the 3/4 cursor buttons, and press the OK/ENTER button to display the start screen.

Select the number of channels for the surround

back speaker you are using.

For a 5.1 channel speaker system, select

“NON” (Surround Back speaker off). (To use speaker C or multi speaker, select “NON”. See page 19, 36.)

Select “START” with the 3/4 cursor buttons

and press the OK/ENTER button to start measurement.

AUTO SETUP

AUTO SETUP: START

MAIN ROOM SURR BACK: 2CH

RETURN EXIT

Detection Check

During the detection check, the following

OSD appears on the display and checks are made to detect dark sound in the listening room, whether there are speakers or not and polarity.

AUTO SETUP

SPEAKERS CHECK:--

NOW ANALYZING !!

CANCEL

EXIT

Note:

• The detection check measures the state of use of all speakers whether actually used or not.

For example, if the center speaker is not used, the

test tone will require time to go from the L-channel to the R-channel, therefore be careful not to unplug the microphone or operate the SR7001 during this time.

When the detection check ends, the following

OSD appears on the display.

AUTO SETUP

SPEAKERS CHECK:OK

1ST MIC POSITION!! START CHECK

EXIT

Here, to view the results of the detection check,

select “CHECK” with the 3/4 cursor buttons and press the OK/ENTER button. The results will be displayed.

SPEAKER CONFIG CHECK !! SPEAKER FRONT : YES CENTER : NON FRONT R : YES SURR.R : YES SURR.B R : NON SURR.B L : NON SURR.L : YES SUB W : YES

RETURN EXIT

If the check results indicate an error, take suitable

action with that item and remeasure. (For error messages, see “ERROR MESSAGES” on page 29.)

After confirming the check results, select

“RETURN” with the 3/4 cursor buttons and press the OK/ENTER button to return to the OSD menu.

At this point, you can select “EXIT” to end Auto

Setup and return to “2. SPKR SETUP”.

Calibration Check

AUTO SETUP

SPEAKERS CHECK:OK

1ST MIC POSITION!! START CHECK

EXIT

Select “START” with the 3/4 cursor buttons

and press the OK/ENTER button to measure the ﬁ rst point (main listening position).

During measurement, the following OSD

appears on the display. At this point, you can cancel measurement by selecting “CANCEL” with the 3/4 cursor buttons and pressing the OK/ENTER button.

AUTO SETUP

NOW ANALYZING!!

CANCEL

EXIT

When this measurement ends, the following

OSD appears on the display

AUTO SETUP

SPEAKERS CHECK:OK

2ND MIC POSITION!! START CALCULATE

EXIT

ENGLISH

8. Move the microphone to the second listening

position, select “START” with the 3/4 cursor buttons and press the OK/ENTER button to measure the second point. At this point, you can cancel second point measurement and calculate measurement results by selecting “CALCULATE” and pressing the OK/ENTER button.

AUTO SETUP

SPEAKERS CHECK:OK

2ND MIC POSITION!! START CALCULATE

EXIT

Repeat steps 7 and 8 until measuring 6

points between the main listening position and surrounding positions.

When all measurements end, the following

OSD appears on the display.

AUTO SETUP

SPEAKERS CHECK:OK

CALCULATE

EXIT

Select “CALCULATE” with the 3/4 cursor

buttons and press the OK/ENTER button to calculate measurement results. During calculations, the following OSD appears on the display.

AUTO SETUP

______________

NOW CALCULATE !!

EXIT

Note:

• Less than 6 positions can be measured, but it is recommended to measure in all 6 positions in order to obtain the best results.

• The time needed to complete calculations depends on the number of connected speakers and measured listening positions. The more speakers and listening positions, the more time is needed.

Checking Measurement Results

10.

When calculations for the measurement results

end, a screen appears for confirming the calculation results.

CHECK RESULT

SPEAKER CONFIG SPEAKER SIZE DISTANCE CHANNEL LEVEL CROSSOVER FREQ

STORE

EXIT

Select items to check with the 3/4 cursor

buttons and press the OK/ENTER button to enter them.

Note:

To check equalizer (MultEQ) parameters, see page

38.

[Example]

Conﬁ rmation screen for speaker detection

SPEAKER CONFIG CHECK !! SPEAKER FRONT : YES CENTER : NON FRONT R : YES SURR.R : YES SURR.B R : NON SURR.B L : NON SURR.L : YES SUB W : YES

RETURN NEXT

[Example] Conﬁ rmation screen for the distance from

speakers to the listening position

DISTANCE UNIT : m FRONT L : 3.05 m CENTER : 3.05 m FRONT R : 3.05 m SURR.R : 3.05 m SURR.B R : 3.05 m SURR.B L : 3.05 m SURR.L : 3.05 m SUB W : 3.05 m

RETURN NEXT

* The units can be changed by moving the cursor to

[ft] of UNIT and pressing 1 / 2 the cursor buttons. Each time a 1 / 2 cursor button is pressed, the units alternate between [ft] (feet) and [m] (meters).

[Example] Conﬁ rmation screen for speaker size and

crossover frequency

SPEAKER SIZE

FRONT L : AUTO CENTER : AUTO FRONT R : AUTO SURR.R : AUTO SURR.B R : AUTO SURR.B L : AUTO SURR.L : AUTO SUB W : AUTO

RETURN NEXT

CROSSOVER FREQ

FRONT : AUTO CENTER : AUTO SURR : AUTO SURR.B : AUTO

RETURN

* AUTO is displayed to indicate that the speaker

size and crossover frequency results were automatically measured.

Storing Measurement Results in Memory

11.

Once finished confirming the measurement

results, select “RETURN” with the 3/4 cursor buttons and press the OK/ENTER button to display the CHECK RESULT screen.

CHANNEL LEVEL

FRONT L : 0.0dB CENTER : -6.5dB FRONT R : -1.5dB SURR.R : +1.0dB SURR.B R : +9.5dB SURR.B L : +12.0dB SURR.L : -2.5dB SUB W : -12.5dB

RETURN NEXT

CHECK RESULT

SPEAKER CONFIG SPEAKER SIZE DISTANCE CHANNEL LEVEL CROSSOVER FREQ

STORE

EXIT

Place the cursor on “STORE” and press the

OK/ENTER button to store all parameters

including the equalizer parameters in memory. If not wanting to store the calculation results in memory, place the cursor on “EXIT” and press the OK/ENTER button.

Note:

Pressing “EXIT” prior to pressing “STORE” erases all measurement results and calculation results, therefore operate the remote control unit with care.

When storing operations end, the following OSD appears on the display.

2.SPKR SETUP

AUTO SETUP MANUAL SETUP

THX AUDIO SETUP

RETURN EXIT

Note:

Do not turn the power to the SR7001 off while storing parameters in memory. This may erase all data in the SR7001’s memory and may damage the receiver.

ERROR MESSAGES

MIC SET ERROR!!

Displayed Error Cause How to Remedy

• The microphone is not properly connected. • Connect the included microphone.

AUTO SETUP

AUTO SETUP: START

MAIN ROOM SURR BACK: 2CH

MIC SET ERROR!!

RETURN EXIT

• Check the microphone connection.

ENGLISH

NOISE ERROR!!

AUTO SETUP

SPEAKERS CHECK:

NOISE ERROR !!

RETURN EXIT

ANALYZE ERROR!!

AUTO SETUP

SPEAKERS CHECK:

ANALYZE ERROR !!

RETURN NEXT EXIT

* Under ANALYZE ERROR, select “NEXT” with the 3/4 cursor

buttons and press the OK/ENTER button. A detail screen like the following appears on the display.

SPEAKER CONFIG CHECK !! SPEAKER FRONT L : YES REV CENTER : NON FRONT R : YES REV SURR.R : NON ERR SURR.B R : YES ERR SURR.B L : YES ERR SURR.L : NON ERR SUB W : YES

RETURN EXIT

• There is too much noise in the listening room to measure properly.

• Volume from the speakers is low.

• The speakers required for suitable playback were not detected.

• Speaker polarity is connected backwards.

In the examples at left, the following trouble is detected.

• The polarity of the left and right channels of the front speakers is backwards ([REV] appears on the display.)

• The surround speaker is not connected ([NON] is displayed), but the surround back speaker is connected

(In this kind of situation, [ERR] is displayed for all surround and

surround back speakers.)

An error is indicated in addition to the above if the speakers are connected as follows.

• When using just one surround back speaker, but it is connected to the surround back R-channel

(To use just one surround back speaker, connect it to the L-

channel.)

• During measurement, turn off devices that make noise such as air conditioners.

• Measure at a time when the surrounding area is quiet.

• Check the speaker that is indicated as having reversed polarity

([REV] can appear with some speakers even when properly

connected. In such case, ignore the error indication.)

• Check speaker direction and layout

ENGLISH

2-2 MANUAL SETUP

1. Select “2. SPKR SETUP” from the MAIN MENU.

Select “MANUAL SETUP” with the 3

cursor buttons.

Press the OK/ENTER button to enter the

selection.

SPEAKER SIZE THX SPKR : NO SUB W : YES FRONT : SMALL CENTER : SMALL SURR. : SMALL SURR.B : 2CH SURR.B SIZE : SMALL LPF/HPF : 80Hz BASS MIX :

RETURN NEXT EXIT

When setting the speaker size in the SPEAKER SIZE menu, use the guidelines below. LARGE:

The complete frequency range for the channel you are setting will be output from the speaker.

SMALL:

Frequencies of the channel you are setting that are lower than approx. 80 Hz will be output from the subwoofer. If the SUB. W is set to “NONE” and the front speakers are set to “LARGE,” then the sound will be output from both the left and right speakers.

Select each speaker with the 3

buttons.

Set the size of each speaker with the 1

cursor buttons.

After you complete this portion of the setup,

move the cursor to “NEXT” with the 3, 4, 1 and 2 cursor buttons and press the OK/ENTER

button to go to the next page.

THX SPKR

If you are using a full THX speaker systems which are approved by THX Ltd:

• The front, center and surround speaker size

should be “SMALL”.

• The subwoofer should be “YES”.

• LPF/HPF (the crossover frequency) should be

“80Hz”.

You need to set the number of surround back speakers be “SMALL”.

and the surround back speaker size should

4 cursor

SUB W

YES:

Select when a subwoofer is connected.

NO:

Select when a subwoofer is not connected.

FRONT

LARGE:

Select if the front speakers are large.

SMALL:

Select if the front speakers are small.

• If “NO” is selected for the subwoofer setting, then this setting is ﬁ xed at “LARGE”.

CENTER

NONE:

Select if no center speaker is connected.

LARGE:

Select if the center speaker is large.

SMALL:

Select if the center speaker is small.

SURR.

NONE:

Select if no surround left and right speakers are connected.

LARGE:

Select if the surround left and right speakers are large.

SMALL:

Select if the surround left and right speakers are small.

SURR. B

NONE:

Select if no surround back left and right speakers are connected.

2CH:

Select if the surround back left and right speakers are connected.

1CH:

Select if one surround back speaker is connected. In this case, the audio signal is emitted from the SURR BACK LEFT output terminal.

Notes:

• If “NONE” is selected for the SURR. setting, then this setting is ﬁ xed to “NONE.”

SURR. BACK SIZE

LARGE:

Select if the surround back speakers are large.

SMALL:

Select if the surround back speakers are small.

Note:

• If “NONE” is selected for the SURR. setting, then this setting is not available.

LPF/HPF

When you use a subwoofer, you can select the cutoff frequency for the small speakers used. Select one of the crossover frequency levels according to the size of the small speakers connected. 60Hz → 80Hz → 100Hz → 120Hz → 140Hz → 160Hz → 180Hz

Note:

• If using small front speakers, set a slightly higher frequency. If using large front speakers, set a slightly lower frequency.

BASS MIX

• The bass mix setting is only valid when “LARGE” is set for the front speakers and “YES” is set for the subwoofer during stereo playback.

This setting has effect only during playback of

PCM or analog stereo sources.

• When “BOTH” is selected, the low frequencies will be played through the main L&R speakers and the subwoofer.

In this playback mode, the low frequency range

expands more uniformly throughout the room, but depending on the size and shape of the room, interference may result in a decrease of the actual volume of the low frequency range.

• By selecting “MIX”, the low frequencies will play through the main L&R only. This selection is preferred by THX.

Note:

• LFE signals during playback of Dolby Digital or DTS will be played through the subwoofer.

After you complete this portion of the setup,

move the cursor to “NEXT” with the and 2

cursor buttons and press the OK/ENTER

button to go to the next page.

3, 4, 1

SPEAKER DISTANCE UNIT : m FRONT L : 3.05 m CENTER : 3.05 m FRONT R : 3.05 m SURR.R : 3.05 m SURR.B R : 3.05 m SURR.B L : 3.05 m SURR.L : 3.05 m SUB W : 3.05 m

RETURN BACK NEXT EXIT

Use this menu to specify the distance of each speaker’s position from the listening position. The delay time is automatically calculated according to these distances. Begin by determining the ideal or most commonly used seating position in the room. This is important for the timing of the acoustics to create the proper sound space that the SR7001 and today’s sound systems are able to produce.

Note:

• For speakers for which you have selected “NONE”, the speaker conﬁ guration sub-menu will not appear here. (There are several useful books and special DVD and LD’s available to guide you through proper home theater conﬁ guration. If you are unsure, have your Marantz dealer perform the installation for you. They are trained professionals familiar with even the most sophisticated custom installations. recommends the www.cedia.org website for further information.)

Select either m (meters) or ft (feet) for UNIT

with the 1

Select each speaker with the 3

buttons.

Set the distance for each speaker , press the 1

10.

FRONT L:

Set the distance from the front left speaker to your normal listening position.

CENTER:

Set the distance from the center speaker to your normal listening position.

FRONT R:

Set the distance from the front right speaker to your normal listening position.

SURR. L:

Set the distance from the surround left speaker to your normal listening position.

SURR. R:

Set the distance from the surround right speaker to your normal listening position.

2 cursor buttons.

Marantz

4 cursor

SUB W:

Set the distance from the subwoofer to your normal listening position.

SURR. B L:

Set the distance from the surround back left speaker to your normal listening position.

SURR. B R:

Set the distance from the surround back right speaker to your normal listening position.

Notes:

• Set the distance to each speaker in meters (m) or feet (ft) as follows.

m: 0.03 - 9.15 m in 0.03 m steps ft: 0.1 - 30.0 ft in 0.1 ft steps (The values appearing on the FL display are

approximate.)

• For the speakers that you have selected “NONE” the speaker size menu will not appear.

• The setting for surr.back L and surr.back R appears if it is set, two surround back speakers in the SPEAKER SIZE menu.

• The setting of SURR. BACK appears if it is set for one surround back speaker in the SPEAKER SIZE menu.

After you complete this portion of the setup,

11.

move the cursor to “NEXT” with the 3, 4, 1 and 2 cursor buttons and press the OK/ENTER

button to go to the next page.

S PEAKER LEVEL TES T MODE : MANUAL FRONT L : 0.0dB CENTER : 0.0dB FRONT R : 0.0dB

S URR.R : 0.0dB S URR.B R : 0.0dB S URR.B L : 0.0dB S URR.L : 0.0dB S UB W : 0.0dB

RETURN BACK EXIT

Here you can set the volume for each speaker so that they are all heard by the listener at the same level. We recommend holding a dB SPL (Sound Pressure Level) meter at the listening position, at arms length, and pointing straight up at the ceiling, adjust the level of each speaker in turn unit it reads 75dB SPL when the meter is set to “C” weighting and Slow responce.

Note:

• The speaker level settings are not available in 7.1 Channel Input mode, Pure Direct mode and Source Direct mode.

TEST MODE:

Select “MANUAL” or “AUTO” generation of the

test tone with the 1

2 cursor buttons.

If you select “AUTO”, the test tone will be cycled through in a circular pattern beginning at Left →

Center → Right → Surround Right → Surround Back Right → Surround Back Left → Surround Left → Subwoofer → Left, in 2 seconds increments

for each channel. Using the 1

2 cursor buttons, adjust the volume level of the noise from the speaker so that it is the same level for all the speakers.

If you select “MANUAL”, adjust the output level of each speaker as listed below.

Move the cursor to FRONT L by pressing the

12.

4 cursor button. The SR7001 will emit a pink noise from the front left speaker.

Remember the level of this noise and then

press the 4 cursor button.

(Note that this can be adjusted to any level

between -12 and +12 dB in 0.5 dB increments.)

The SR7001 will now emit the pink noise from

the center speaker.

Using the 1 and 2 cursor buttons, adjust the

13.

volume level of the noise from the center speaker so that it is the same level as the front left speaker.

Press the 4 cursor button again. The SR7001

14.

will now emit the pink noise from the front right speaker.

Repeat steps 13 and 14 for the front right and

15.

other speakers until all speakers are adjusted to the same volume level.

After you complete this portion of the setup, press the OK/ENTER button to move the cursor to “RETURN”. Press the OK/ENTER button to go to “2. SPKR SETUP”.

Notes:

• Speakers for which you selected “NONE” in the SPEAKER SIZE menu will not appear.

• Surr. Back L and Surr. Back R appear if it is set for two surround back speakers in the SPEAKER SIZE menu.

• Surr. Back appears if it is set for one surround back speaker in the SPEAKER SIZE menu.

• To adjust the speaker levels for 7.1 channel input sources, you will need to use the 7.1 Ch Input sub menu. (See page 32)

• SUB W can be set from –18dB to +12dB.

2-3 THX AUDIO SETUP

You can set the advanced Speaker Array.

Select “2. SPEAKER SETUP” from the MAIN

MENU.

Select “THX AUDIO SETUP” with the 3

cursor buttons.

3. Press the OK/ENTER button to enter the selection.

THX AUDIO SETUP

ADVANCED SPKR ARRAY SURR.B SPKR :TOGETHER

RETURN EXIT

Advanced Speaker Array (ASA)

SURR.B SPKR: TOGETHER, CLOSE or APART

The best ASA effect is when the surround back speakers are together and facing forward. If the distance between the surround back speakers is,

• Less than 12 in. (30 cm): TOGETHER

• Greater than 12 in. (30 cm), and less than 48 in.

(122 cm): CLOSE

• Greater than 48 in. (122 cm): APART

Speaker type and positioning

This diagram shows the desired positioning for 7.1 channel speaker systems used in ASA mode. During system setup, select the distance between surround back speakers.

Front-L Center Front-R

Surround-L Surround-R

Surround A

Surround Back

SBL SBR

Surround B

Surround A

Di-polar Radiating Speaker

Direct Radiating Speaker

Note:

• If you set SURR.B = 1CH or NONE in the SPEAKER SIZE menu, Advanced Speaker Array will not be activated.

After you complete this portion of the setup, move the cursor to “RETURN” with 3, 4, 1 and 2 cursor buttons and press OK/ENTER button to go to the 2. SPKR SETUP menu.

ENGLISH

3 SURROUND SETUP

This menu is for setting surround effect parameters for the various surround input signals so as to bring out the live audio effect of your speaker system.

•

CHANNEL LEVEL:

“3-1 CHANNEL LEVEL”

•

x MUSIC PARAMETER:

“3-2 PLII x MUSIC PARAMETER”

•

CSII PARAMETER:

“3-3 CSII PARAMETER”

•

NEO:6 PARAMETER:

“3-4 NEO:6 PARAMETER”

Select “3. SURR SETUP” from the MAIN

MENU with the 3

(see page 32)

(see page 33)

4 cursor buttons and press

the OK/ENTER button.

Select the desired menu with the 3

buttons and press the OK/ENTER button.

3.SURR SETUP

CHANNEL LEVEL PL x MUSIC PARAMETER CS PARAMETER NEO:6 PARAMETER

RE-EQ : OFF LFE LEVEL :

RETURN NEXT EXIT

RE-EQ:

Turns THX Cinema Re-EQ™ on and off. Select the Cinema Re-EQ™ with the 1 or 2 cursor button to activate it.

LFE LEVEL:

Select the output level of the LFE signal included in the Dolby Digital signal or the DTS signal. Select “0dB”, “–10 dB” or “OFF” with 1 or 2 cursor button.

After you complete this portion of the setup, move the cursor to “RETURN” with the 3, 4, 1, 2 cursor buttons and press the OK/ENTER button.

4 cursor

3.SURR SETUP

CHANNEL LEVEL PL x MUSIC PARAMETER CS PARAMETER NEO:6 PARAMETER

RE-EQ : OFF LFE LEVEL :

RETURN NEXT EXIT

P. 32

☞

CHANNEL LEVEL SURR.MODE: AUTO

CENTER : 0.0dB SURR.R : 0.0dB SURR.B R : 0.0dB SURR.B L : 0.0dB SURR.L : 0.0dB SUB W : 0.0dB

RETURN EXIT

P. 33

☞

PL x MUSIC PARAMETER

PARAMETER :DEFAULT

PANORAMA :OFF DIMENSION : 0 CENTER WIDTH: 3

RETURN NEXT EXIT

P. 33

☞

CS PARAMETER

TRUBASS : 0 SRS DIALOG : 0

RETURN NEXT EXIT

P. 33

☞

NEO:6 PARAMETER

CENTER GAIN : 0.3

RETURN NEXT EXIT

Note:

• After you complete this portion of the setup, press the OK/ENTER button to move the cursor to “RETURN” and press the OK/ENTER button again to go to sub-menu.

3-1 CHANNEL LEVEL

1. Select “3. SURR SETUP” from MAIN MENU with 3

4 cursor buttons and press the OK/

ENTER button.

Select “CHANNEL LEVEL” with the 3

cursor buttons and press the OK/ENTER button.

Set the SURR. MODE with the 1

buttons.

CHANNEL LEVEL SURR.MODE: AUTO

CENTER : 0.0dB SURR.L : 0.0dB SURR.R : 0.0dB SURR.BACK L : 0.0dB SURR.BACK R : 0.0dB SUB W : 0.0dB

RETURN EXIT

4. Select the desired menu item with the 3 cursor buttons, set the desired level with the 1 or

2 cursor buttons, and press the OK/ENTER

button.

SURROUND MODE:

The surround mode can be independently set for 3 modes.

1. Multi Ch STEREO

2. CSII

3. Others

CHANNEL LEVEL

CENTER LEVEL:

Set the effect level of the center speaker between –12 and +12 level in 0.5 level interval .

• If “NONE” was selected for the center speaker setting in the SPEAKER SIZE, then this setting will not appear.

SURR L or R LEVEL:

Set the effect level of the Surround speaker between –12 and +12 level in 0.5 level interval .

• If “NONE” was selected for the surround speakers setting in the SPEAKER SIZE, then this setting will not appear.

SURR. BACK L or R LEVEL:

Set the effect level of the Surround Back speaker between –12 and +12 level in 0.5 level interval .

• If “NONE” was selected for the surround back speakers setting in the SPEAKER SIZE, then this setting will not appear.

2 cursor

SUB W LEVEL:

Set the effect level of the subwoofer speaker between –18 and +12 level in 0.5 level interval .

• If “NONE” was selected for the subwoofer speaker setting in the SPEAKER SIZE, then this setting will not appear.

Note:

• Setting to a mode other than multichannel stereo or CSII will affect the speaker level as explained in “2-2 MANUAL SETUP”.

After you complete this portion of the setup, move the cursor to “RETURN” with the 3, 4, 1 and 2 cursor buttons and press the OK/ENTER button to go to the

3. SURR SETUP menu.

3-2 PLIIx (PRO LOGIC IIx) MUSIC PARAMETER

Pro LogicIIx-Music mode creates a rich and enveloping surround ambience from stereo sources such as CDs. In this mode, the SR7001 includes three controls to ﬁ ne-tune the sound ﬁ eld as follows.

1. Select “3. SURR SETUP” in MAIN MENU with 3

4 cursor buttons and press the OK/

ENTER button.

Select “PLIIx MUSIC PARAMETER” with the

4 cursor buttons.

Press the OK/ENTER button to enter the

selection.

PL x MUSIC PARAMETER

PARAMETER :DEFAULT

PANORAMA :OFF DIMENSION : 0 CENTER WIDTH: 3

If “NONE” was selected for the center speaker setting in the SPEAKER SIZE menu, this setting cannot be selected.

After you complete this portion of the setup, move cursor to “RETURN” with the 3, 4, 1 and 2 cursor buttons and press the OK/ENTER button.

3-3 CSII PARAMETER

1. Select “3. SURROUND SETUP” from MAIN MENU with the 3 press the OK/ENTER button.

Select “CS II PARAMETER” with the 3

cursor buttons.

Press the OK/ENTER button to enter the

selection.

CS PARAMETER

TRUBASS : 0 SRS DIALOG : 0

4 cursor buttons and

3-4 NEO:6 PARAMETER

The DTS NEO:6 mode enables a maximum 6.1 channel output with just 2 channel input. (It also supports 5.1 channel input.) This mode expands the sound image from the center channel.

Select “3. SURROUND SETUP” from MAIN

MENU with the 3 press the OK/ENTER button.

Select “NEO:6 PARAMETER” with the 3

cursor buttons.

Press the OK/ENTER button to enter the

selection.

NEO:6 PARAMETER

CENTER GAIN : 0.3

4 cursor buttons and

ENGLISH

RETURN NEXT EXIT

PARAMETER:

Select “DEFAULT” or “CUSTOM” with the 1 or 2 cursor buttons. If you select “CUSTOM”, you can adjust three parameters as listed below.

PANORAMA:

Select the PANORAMA mode “ON” or “OFF” with the 1 or 2 cursor buttons. Panorama wraps the sound of the front left and right speakers around you, for an exciting perspective.

DIMENSION:

Set the DIMENSION level between –3 and +3 level in 1 level intervals with the 1 or 2 cursor buttons. Adjust the sound ﬁ eld either towards the front or towards the rear. This can be useful to help achieve a more suitable balance from all the speakers with certain recordings.

CENTER WIDTH:

Set the CENTER WIDTH level between 0 and 7 in 1 level intervals with the 1 or 2 cursor buttons. Center width allows you to gradually spread the center channel sound into the front left and right speakers. At its widest setting, all the sound from the center is mixed into the left and right speakers. This control may help achieve a more spacious sound or a better blend for the front image.

RETURN NEXT EXIT

TRUBASS:

Set the TRUBASS level between 0 and 6 in 1- level increments with the TRUBASS produced by the speakers are an octave below the actual physical capabilities of the speakers adding exciting, deeper bass effects.

SRS DIALOG:

Set the SRS DIALOG level between increments This can be popped out of the surround audio effects, allowing the listener to easily discern what the actors say. If “NONE” was selected for the center speaker setting in the SPEAKER SIZE menu, this setting cannot be selected.

After you complete this portion of the setup, move cursor to “RETURN” with the 3, 4, 1 and 2 cursor buttons and press the OK/ENTER button.

Note:

• This parameter can only be set in the CSII mode.

1 or 2

cursor buttons.

with the 1 or 2 cursor buttons.

0 and 6

in 1-

RETURN NEXT EXIT

4. Set the CENTER GAIN level between 0.0 and

1.0 in 0.1 level buttons.

After you complete this portion of the setup, move cursor to “RETURN” with the 3, 4, 1 and 2 cursor buttons and press the OK/ENTER button.

Notes:

• This parameter can only be set in the NEO:6-Music mode.

• If “NONE” was selected for the center speaker setting in the SPEAKER SIZE menu, this setting is disabled.

increments

with the 1

2 cursor

ENGLISH

4 VIDEO SETUP

Video settings are made as follows.

Select “4. VIDEO SETUP” from the MAIN

MENU with the 3/4 cursor buttons and press the OK/ENTER button.

4.VIDEO SETUP

VIDEO CONVERT

TV.AUTO :DISABLE OSD INFO :ENABLE I/P CONVERT :ENABLE HDMI OUT :OUTPUT1 COMPO OUT2 :MAIN

RETURN NEXT EXIT

Select the desired menu with the 3/4 cursor

buttons and press the OK/ENTER button.

•

VIDEO CONVERT

“4-1 VIDEO CONVERT”

•

TV-AUTO

Select the TV AUTO ON/OFF function to enable or disable with the 1 or 2 cursor buttons. (refer to page 45)

•

OSD INFO

Select the OSD information function to “ENABLE” or “DISABLE” with the 1 or 2 cursor buttons. If you select “ENABLE”, the SR7001 will display the status of the feature (Volume up/down, input select, etc..) on the monitor. If you do not desire this information, select “DISABLE”.

Note:

• OSD information is not output to Monitor Output of HDMI and Component Video. However, OSD information is output if the Video Convert function is used to output Video or S-Video video signals to Monitor Out of HDMI and Component Video.

For details, refer to“VIDEO CONVERT”on page 40.

•

IP CONVERT

Select the IP CONVERT ON/OFF function to enable or disable with the 1 or 2 cursor buttons. (refer to page 40)

•

HDMI OUT

(This feature is not available on the SR7001.) This setting is for selecting which output terminal,

HDMI 1 or HDMI 2, to output the signal to. Select the output destination with the 1 / 2 cursor buttons.

•

COMPONENT OUT

(This feature is not available on the SR7001.) This setting is for selecting whether to output

the images for the main room or the images for the multi room system to the COMPONENT MONITOR OUT 2 terminal. Select the output destination between MAIN and MULTI with the 1 / 2 cursor buttons.

Note:

• When MULTI 1 is selected, video signals converted from the MONITOR OUT 2 terminal are not output.

After you complete this portion of the setup, move cursor to “RETURN” with the 3, 4, 1 and 2 cursor

ENTER

buttons and press the OK/

button.

4-1 VIDEO CONVERT

The SR7001 is equipped to convert video signals for monitor output. This section explains how to set up conversion for each type of video input.

Select “4. VIDEO SETUP” from the MAIN

MENU with the 3 / 4 cursor buttons and press the OK/ENTER button.

Select “VIDEO CONVERT” with the 3 / 4 cursor

buttons and press the OK/ENTER button.

VIDEO CONVERT

TV : ANA&HDMI DVD : ANA&HDMI VCR1 : ANA&HDMI DSS : ANA&HDMI AUX1 : ANA&HDMI TAPE : ANA&HDMI CD/R : ANA&HDMI AUX2 : ANA&HDMI

RETURN BACK EXIT

Select “FUNCTION” with the 3 / 4 cursor

buttons and set the video conversion mode with the 1 / 2 cursor buttons

ANA&HDMI:

This mode both up-converts and down-converts analog video signals (Composite Video, S-Video, Component Video). Furthermore, it up-converts from analog video signal to HDMI. (It cannot downconvert from HDMI digital video signals to analog video signals.)

ANA ONLY:

This mode both up-converts and down-converts analog video signals (Composite Video, S-Video, Component Video). It does not up-convert to HDMI.

OFF:

This mode turns off all conversion features.

Note:

• For details on video convert feature, see page 40.

5 PREFERENCE

•

MULTI ROOM SETUP :

“5-1 MULTI ROOM SETUP”

•

DC TRIGGER SETUP :

“5-2 DC TRIGGER SETUP”

Select “5. PREFERENCE” from MAIN MENU

with the 3

4 cursor buttons and press the

OK/ENTER button.

5.PREFERENCE

MULTI ROOM SETUP A B

DC TRIGGER SETUP 1 2

STANDBY : NORMAL BILINGUAL : MAIN HDMI AUDIO: ENABLEH

RETURN NEXT EXIT

(see page 36)

5.PREFERENCE

MULTI ROOM SETUP A B

DC TRIGGER SETUP 1 2

STANDBY : NORMAL BILINGUAL : MAIN HDMI AUDIO: ENABLEH

RETURN NEXT EXIT

DC TRIGGER SETUP DC TRIG-1:DISABLE

TV : TAPE : DVD : CD/R : VCR1 : AUX2 : DSS : TUNER : AUX1 : 7.1CH :

RETURN NEXT EXIT

MULTI ROOM SETUP A

VIDEO :DVD AUDIO :DVD SLEEP :OFF MONO/ST:STEREO

MULT:OFF MSPK: VOL :VARI VOL : LEV :-90dB LEV :

RETURN BACK EXIT

ENGLISH

2. Select the desired menu with the 3

4 cursor

buttons and press the OK/ENTER button.

STAND BY:

When this is set to “ECONOMY”, you can reduce the power consumption when the unit is in the Standby mode. When “ECONOMY” is selected, “TV AUTO” and “RS-232C” are disabled when the unit is in the Standby mode.

BILINGUAL:

In the Bilingual mode, Dolby Digital and DTS output is set to either “MAIN” or “SUB”. Select “BILINGUAL” with the 1 or 2 cursor buttons, then select MAIN ↔ SUB ↔ MAIN+SUB with the 1 or 2 cursor buttons.

HDMI AUDIO:

This setting determines whether to play back audio input to the HDMI jacks through the SR7001 or output it through the receiver to a TV or projector. ENABLE: The audio input to the HDMI jacks

can be played back by this receiver. In such case, audio signals are not output to the TV or projector.

THROUGH: The audio input to the HDMI jacks is

not output from the speaker terminals of the SR7001. Audio data is output directly to the TV or projector. This setting is used to listen to audio on a multi channel TV, etc.

After you complete this portion of the setup, move the cursor to “RETURN” with the 3, 4, 1 and 2 cursor

ENTER

buttons and press the OK/

button.

DC TRIGGER SETUP DC TRIG-2:DISABLE

TV : TAPE : DVD : CD/R : VCR1 : AUX2 : DSS : TUNER : AUX1 : 7.1CH :

RETURN BACK EXIT

MULTI ROOM SETUP B

AUDIO :DVD SLEEP :OFF MONO/ST:STEREO

MULT:OFF MSPK: VOL :VARI VOL : LEV :-90dB LEV :

RETURN BACK EXIT

(The SR7001 is not equipped with the MULTI ROOM SETUP B feature)

ENGLISH

5-1 MULTI ROOM SETUP

The SR8001 has source selectors, sleep timers and multispeaker output remote control units (Room A only) for the two other rooms in the multi room system. (The SR7001 has only one other room in the multi-room system.) These features can be set from this menu.

Select “5. PREFERENCE” from the MAIN

MENU with the 3 or 4 cursor buttons and press the OK/ENTER button.

Select “MULTI ROOM SETUP” with the 3 or 4

cursor buttons and select either “Room A” or “Room B” with the 1 or 2 cursor buttons.

Press the OK/ENTER button to enter the

setting.

The following explanation shows how to operate MULTI ROOM A of the multi-room system. The MULTI ROOM B setting does not have the VIDEO FUNCTION. (The SR7001 does not have a MULTI ROOM B setting)

MULTI ROOM SETUP A

VIDEO :DVD AUDIO :DVD SLEEP :OFF MONO/ST:STEREO

MULT:OFF MSPK: VOL :VARI VOL : LEV :-90dB LEV :

RETURN BACK EXIT

MULTI (MULTI ROOM):

Switch the multiroom output “ON” or “OFF” with the 1 or 2 cursor buttons.

MSPK (MULTI SPEAKER):

Switch the speaker output “ON” or “OFF” with the

1 or 2 cursor buttons.

VOL (VOLUME SETUP):

Select whether the multiroom or multi speaker output level is variable or ﬁ xed with the 1 or 2 cursor buttons.

LEVEL (VOLUME LEVEL):

Adjust the multiroom output level with the 1 or 2 cursor buttons. The volume can be set between

-90 dB and 0 dB in 1 dB increments.

Note:

• This setting can be changed when the SURR B is set to “NONE” in the SPEAKER SIZE menu and “SPEAKER C” is in the OFF position on the rear panel. When this setting is unavailable, “***” is displayed.

• If “VOLUME” is set to “FIXED”, the multiroom output level cannot be adjusted from the A or B room.

• MSPK cannot be on for both Room A and Room B at the same time. After you complete this portion of the setup, move the cursor to “RETURN” with the 3 or 4 cursor buttons and press the OK/ENTER button.

5-2 DC TRIGGER SETUP

This unit has 2 DC trigger control jacks, which can be used to link with input functions for the main room or multiroom. Each trigger can be setup separately.

Select “5. PREFERENCE” from MAIN MENU

with the 3 OK/ENTER button.

Select “DC TRIGGER SETUP 1or 2” with the

3, 4, 1 and 2 cursor buttons.

Press the OK/ENTER button to enter the

selection.

4. You can select “MAIN ROOM”, “MULTI

ROOM A”, “MULTI ROOM B”, “REMOTE” “DISABLE” with the 1

(The SR7001 does not have a MULTI ROOM B

setting)

Note:

• REMOTE is available for the external control. The RC8001SR cannot operate the function.

4 cursor buttons and press the

DC TRIGGER SETUP DC TRIG-1:DISABLE

TV : TAPE : DVD : CD/R : VCR1 : AUX2 : DSS : TUNER : AUX1 : 7.1CH :

RETURN NEXT EXIT

2 cursor buttons.

Select the desired item with the 3

button.

VIDEO:

Select the video source of the multiroom output with the 1 or 2 cursor buttons.

AUDIO:

Select the audio source of the multiroom output with the 1 or 2 cursor buttons.

SLEEP:

The sleep mode is available when the multiroom is active, set the time with 1 or 2 cursor buttons. The sleep timer can be set to a maximum 90 minutes in 10 minute increments.

MONO/ST:

This mode switches audio output to the multi room system between MONAURAL and STEREO, using the 1 and 2 cursor buttons.

4 cursor

Select desired input source with the 3

cursor buttons.

Set to “ON” or “OFF” with the 1

buttons.

After you complete this portion of the setup,

move the cursor to “RETURN” with the 3 4 cursor button and press the OK/ENTER

button.

Note:

• When an input source that is on in the set room is selected, voltage is output to the DC TRIGGER output terminal.

2 cursor

6 ACOUSTIC EQ

This display is for setting up the equalizer and changing the Equalizer mode.

•

PRESET G. EQ ADJ :

“6-1 PRESET G. EQ ADJ”

•

CHECK AUTO 1 & 2 :

“6-2 CHECK AUTO”

EQ MODE:

There are 4 equalizer modes to choose from: PRESET G. EQ that allows the user to manually adjust the equalizer, and AUDYSSEY, FRONT and FLAT that automatically adjust the equalizer from the measurement results of the AUTO SETUP feature (see page 27).

AUDYSSEY:

This mode adjusts the frequency characteristics of all speakers so as to create the best listening environment for the sound characteristics of the listening room.

FRONT:

This mode matches the characteristics of each speaker to those of the front speakers.

FLAT:

This mode ﬂ attens the frequency characteristics of all speakers. It is suited for playback of multichannel music such as Dolby Digital and DTS.

PRESET:

This mode adjusts the graphic equalizer that Ｓ characteristics of each speaker (see page 38).

OFF:

The graphic equalizer is not used.

1. Select “6. ACOUSTIC EQ” from MAIN MENU with the 3

4 cursor buttons and press the

OK/ENTER button.

6.ACOUSTIC EQ.

EQ.MODE : OFF

PRESET G.EQ ADJ CHECK AUTO

(see page 38)

Select “FRONT”, “FLAT”, “AUDYSSEY”,

“PRESET” or “OFF” with the 1

2 cursor

buttons.

After you complete this portion of the setup, move the cursor to “RETURN” with the 3, 4, 1 and 2 cursor

ENTER

buttons and press the OK/

button.

Note:

• “AUDYSSEY”, “FRONT” and “FLAT” can be selected after executing the AUTO SETUP feature.

• If a speaker that was determined “NON” in Auto Setup is manually turned on, the “AUDYSSEY”, “FRONT” and “FLAT” modes cannot be selected.

• The equalizer turns off when the Pure Direct mode, Source Direct mode, Dolby Headphone or Virtual mode is set.

6.ACOUSTIC EQ.

EQ.MODE : OFF

PRESET G.EQ1 ADJ CHECK AUTO

RETURN NEXT EXIT

PRESET ADJUST RESET:ALLCH 63-15.0 CH :SR 125 -2.5 250 -5.0

500 +9.0

1k +3.5 2k -5.5 4k -7.0 8k-18.5

250 1k 4k 16kHz

16k-20.0

125 500 2k 8k

RETURN EXIT

CHECK AUTO MD:AUDYSSEY 63-15.0 CH:SR 125 -2.5 250 -5.0

500 +9.0

1k +3.5 2k -5.5 4k -7.0 8k-18.5

250 1k 4k 16kHz

16k-20.0

125 500 2k 8k

RETURN EXIT

ENGLISH

RETURN NEXT EXIT

2. Select “EQ. MODE” with the 3 buttons.

4 cursor

ENGLISH

6-1 PRESET G. EQ ADJ

These modes allow you to set a 9-band graphic equalizer for each of the 7 channels.

Select “6. ACOUSTIC EQ” from MAIN MENU

with the 3

4 cursor buttons and press the

OK/ENTER button.

2. Select “PRESET G. EQ ADJ” with the 3 cursor buttons.

Press the OK/ENTER button to enter the

selection.

PRES ET ADJUST RES ET:CH 63 0.0 CH :FL 125 0.0 250 0.0

500 0.0

0dB

1k 0.0 2k 0.0 4k 0.0 8k 0.0

250 1k 4k 16kHz

16k 0.0

125 500 2k 8k

RETURN EXIT

RESET:

Using the 1 or 2 cursor buttons, select the channel(s) to be reset to either the currently displayed channel (“CH”) or all channels (“ALL”), and press the OK/ENTER button to enter the setting. “ALL” : Resets all channels. “CH” : Resets only the currently displayed

channel.

CH:

Select the channel (“FL”, “C”, “FR”, “SR”, “SBR”, “SBL” or “SL”) to adjust with the 1 or 2 cursor buttons, and switch to the adjustment mode with the 4 cursor button.

Frequency:

Select the target frequency on the graph with the 1 or 2 cursor buttons and press the OK/ENTER button to enter the selection. Adjust the level with the 3 or 4 cursor buttons. (Note that this can be adjusted to any level between –20 and +9 dB in

0.5 dB increments.) Move to the next frequency with the 1 or 2 cursor buttons, and adjust the level.

6-2 CHECK AUTO

These menus are for confirming the results of AUTO SETUP function equalizer measurement (AUDYSSEY, FRONT, FLAT).

Select “6. ACOUSTIC EQ” from MAIN MENU

with the 3 OK/ENTER button.

2. Select “CHECK AUTO” with the 3 or 4 cursor buttons.

Press the OK/ENTER button to enter the

selection.

Select MD (mode) with the 3 / 4 cursor buttons followed by the desired equalizer (“AUDYSSEY”, “FRONT”, “FLAT”).

CH:

Select the channel to check with the 1 or 2 cursor buttons.

Notes:

• The frequency will not be exactly the same as in the Preset G. EQ modes.

• FL and FR are not indicated on the CHECK AUTO 2 menu.

Once ﬁ nished checking, select “RETURN” with

the 3 / 4 cursor buttons and press the OK/ ENTER button to return to the “6. ACOUSTIC

EQ” menu.

4 cursor buttons and press the

CHECK AUTO MD:AUDYSSEY 63 0.0 CH:FL 125 0.0 250 0.0

500 0.0

0dB

1k 0.0 2k 0.0 4k 0.0 8k 0.0

250 1k 4k 16kHz

16k 0.0

125 500 2k 8k

RETURN EXIT

After you complete this portion of the setup, press the OK/ENTER button to enter the settings. Move cursor to “RETURN” with the 3, 4, 1 and 2 cursor buttons and press the OK/ENTER button.

7.1CH

ATT

SPK-AB

BASIC OPERATION

(PLAY BACK)

SELECTING AN INPUT SOURCE

Before you can listen to any input media, you must ﬁ rst select the input source on the SR7001.

Example : DVD

AV SURROUND RECEIVER SR8001

INPUT SELECTOR

STANDBY

POWER ON/OFF

To select DVD, turn the INPUT SELECTOR knob on the front panel or press the DVD button on the remote two times in a row. After you have selected DVD, simply turn on the DVD player and play the DVD.

• As the input source is changed, the new input name will appear momentarily an OSD information on the video display. The input name will also appear in the display, on the front-panel.

• If you use the FUNCTION RENAME feature (see page 25) , the renamed name appears on the display.

• As the input is changed, the SR7001 will automatically switch to the digital input, surround mode, attenuation, and night mode status which were entered during the conﬁ guration process for that source.

• When an audio source is selected, the last video input used remains routed to the VCR1 & DSS/ VCR2 Outputs and Monitor Output. This permits simultaneous viewing and listening to different sources.

• When a video source is selected, the selected video signal is output from the MONITOR OUT terminal.

PURE DIRECT

DISP MULTI AUTO TUNE

SURR DIRECT

SLEEP

AUTO

DSD

SURROUND

SPE

MODE AUTO

MULTI

7.1CH INPUT

PURE DIRECT THX

PHONES

TUNERCDCD-R

TAPE

DSS

VCRDVD

DVD

AMP

AUX2

AUX1

LIGHT

RC8001SR

Learning Remote Controller

SELECTING THE SURROUND MODE

Example: AUTO SURROUND

PAGE

123

5 64

OSD

8097

AUX1

LIGHT

RC8001SR

Learning Remote Controller

SLEEP

MEMO

AMP

AUX2

AMP

USE

AV SURROUND RECEIVER SR8001

INPUT SELECTOR

STANDBY

POWER ON/OFF

PURE DIRECT

DISP MULTI AUTO TUNED

SURR DIRECT

SLEEP

AUTO

DSD

SURROUND

MODE AUTO

SPEA

MULTI

7.1CH INPUT

PURE DIRECT THX

PHONES

DISP

CLEAR

TUNERCDCD-R

TAPE

(Using the SR7001)

To select the Auto surround mode during playback, press the AUTO button on the front panel.

(Using the remote control unit)

To select the Auto surround mode, press the AMP button and press the > button until PAGE1 is displayed. Press the AUTO (D1) button.

• For surround modes, see “Surround Mode” on page 41.

• To add the THX mode to the Auto Surround mode, press either the THX button on the SR7001 or the THX button on the remote control unit.

• To select a speciﬁ c surround mode, Press the individual surround mode button on page 1.2 on the remote control unit.

ADJUSTING THE MAIN VOLUME

AK ANALOG

BAND

SURROUND

ATT

DIGITAL

LCR

LFE

AAC

PCM

SL S SR

MEMORY CLEAR

T-MODE

DISPLAY

SPEAKERS

MultEQ A/B

EXIT

MIC

VOLUME

DOWN

DIGITAL

AUX 1 INPUT

RLVIDEO

S-VIDEO

AUDIO

TEST

7.1CH

Adjust the volume to a comfortable level using the VOLUME control knob on the front panel or VOLUME 3 / 4 buttons on the remote. To increase the volume, turn the VOLUME knob clockwise or press VOLUME 3 button on the remote, to decrease the volume, turn counterclockwise or press VOLUME 4 button on the remote.

Notes:

• The volume can be adjusted within the range of – ∞ to 18 dB, in steps of 1 dB.

•

However, when the channel level is set as described on page 32, if the volume for any channel is set at +1 dB or greater, the volume cannot be adjusted up to 18 dB.

(In this case the maximum volume adjustment range

is “18 dB - Maximum value of channel level)

VOL

LIP.SYNC

MUTE

GUIDE

EXIT

CH.SEL

SURR

2 31

ATT

SPK-AB

NIGHT MODE

USE

TUNERCDCD-R

AUX1

TAPE

Learning Remote Controller

(Using the remote control unit)

adjust the tone

, press the AMP button and press

the > button PAGE3 is displayed. Press the

NIGHT (D1)

button to turn on the Night mode. Setting the Night mode to “ON” compresses the dynamic range in Dolby Digital only. This softens loud passages such as sudden explosions, to help prevent disturbing others late at

To turn off the Night mode, Press the NIGHT

night. (D1) button again.

PAGE

AMP

AUX2

AMP

LIGHT

RC8001SR

ADJUSTING THE TONE (BASS & TREBLE) CONTROL

USE

TUNER

AUX1

TAPE

Learning Remote Controller

PAGE

CD-R

AMP

AUX2

AMP

LIGHT

RC8001SR

During a listening session you may wish to adjust the Bass and Treble Control to suit your listening tastes or room acoustics.

(Using the remote control unit)

adjust the tone

, press the AMP button and press the > button PAGE3 is displayed. To adjust the bass effect, press BASS+ (D2) or BASS– (D3). To adjust the treble effect, TREB+ (D4) or TREB– (D5).

Notes:

• The tone control function is unavailable for the Source Direct, Pure Direct, Dolby Headphone, Dolby Virtual Speaker THX mode, and 192kHz PCM.

• The tone control function is not available when PRESET G.EQ is being used.

DIALOGUE NORMALIZATION MESSAGE

Dialogue Normalization (Dial Norm) is a feature of Dolby Digital. When playing back software which has been encoded in Dolby Digital, sometimes you may see a brief message on the FL display which will read "Dial Norm X dB" (X being a numeric value). Dialogue Normalization serves to let you know if the source material has been recorded at a higher or lower level than usual. For example, if you see the following message: "Dial Norm + 4 dB" on the FL display, to keep the overall output level constant just turn down the volume control by 4 dB. In other words, the source material that you are listening to has been recorded 4 dB louder than usual. If you do not see a message on the FL display, then no adjustment of the volume control is necessary.

ENGLISH

LIP.SYNC

VIDEO CONVERT

ANALOG VIDEO CONVERSION

The SR7001 is equipped to convert video signals for monitor output. Because of this, indifferent of the connection (VIDEO, S-VIDEO, COMPONENT VIDEO) between the playback device and the SR7001, listening and viewing are possible with a single higher grade cable between the MONITOR OUT terminal of the SR7001 and the monitor.

UP-CONVERSION FROM ANALOG VIDEO SIGNALS TO HDMI

The up-conversion feature of the SR7001 can output the input analog video signals (for component video signals of 480i/576i, 480p/576P, 1080i and 720p resolution, and S-Video and Video (composite) of 480i/576i resolution) to the HDMI MONITOR terminal.

Notes:

• HDMI video input is only output to the HDMI MONITOR OUT terminal of the SR7001. If connecting a playback device such as a DVD player to the HDMI input jack, connect the HDMI MONITOR OUT terminal of the SR7001 to a TV monitor.

• This mode is unavailable for the REC out terminal.

• This mode is unavailable for still picture, fast forward and reverse play on video component.

If, while attempting to use the video convert feature,

• the SR7001 cannot synchronize with the display device, “NO SIGNAL” appears on the monitor or noise is generated, this feature cannot be used. All of these signs are caused by equipment incompatibility; there is nothing wrong with the SR7001. If this occurs, set “VIDEO CONVERT” in the “VIDEO SETUP” menu to “DISABLE”. Next, connect the video input signal to the display component via the MONITOR OUT terminal under VIDEO and the S-video input signal to the display component via the MONITOR OUT terminal under S-VIDEO.

• The video convert feature constantly monitors input video signals and determines whether to convert the input signals or not. However, some input video signals cannot be detected correctly. If this occurs, set “VIDEO CONVERT” in the “VIDEO SETUP” menu to “DISABLE”.

•

For optimal video performance, THX recommends setting the “VIDEO CONVERT” mode “DISABLE”.

CONNECTION EXAMPLE

• When a monitor is connected to the HDMI MONITOR OUT terminal of the SR7001

AV SURROUND RECEIVER SR8001

INPUT SELECTOR

PURE DIRECT

DSD

SURROUND

MODE AUTO

MULTI

PURE DIRECTTHX

STANDBY

POWER ON/OFF

PHONES

VIDEO

or S-VIDEO

or component

or HDMI

Notes:

• If the resolution of the component video signal input from the playback device is other than 480i/576i, 480p/576P, 1080i or 720p, images are not output from the HDMI MONITOR OUT terminal of the SR8001.

• If the resolution of the S-Video or Video signal input from the playback device is other than 480i/576i, images are not output from the HDMI MONITOR OUT terminal of the SR7001.

• When a monitor is connected to the VIDEO or SVIDEO MONITOR OUT terminals of the SR7001

AV SURROUND RECEIVER SR8001

INPUT SELECTOR

PURE DIRECT

AUTO

SLEEP

DSD

SURROUND

MODE AUTO

PURE DIRECTTHX

STANDBY

POWER ON/OFF

PHONES

VIDEO

or S-VIDEO

or component

HDMI

Notes:

• The HDMI video signal input from the playback device is not output from the VIDEO or S-VIDEO MONITOR OUT terminals of the SR7001.

• If the resolution of the component video signal input from the playback device is other than 480i/576i, it is not output from the VIDEO or S-VIDEO MONITOR OUT terminals of the SR7001.

MULTI SPEAKER

7.1CH INPUT

ENTER

SURRDIRECT

DISC 6.1 MTX 6.1 EQ

MULTI SPEAKER

MULTI

7.1CH INPUT

ENTER

BAND

MEMORY CLEAR

T-MODE

DISPLAY

SPEAKERS

A/B

MultEQ

EXIT

MIC

SURROUND

V-OFFDISP MULTI AUTOTUNED STSPKR A B

PEAK ANALOG

ATT

DIGITAL

NIGHT

LCR

LFE

AAC

PCM

SLS SR

MEMORY CLEAR

BAND

T-MODE

DISPLAY

SPEAKERS

A/B

MultEQ

EXIT

MIC

VOLUME

DOWN

AUX 1 INPUT

DIGITAL

RLVIDEO

S-VIDEO

AUDIO

HDMI

VOLUME

DOWN

AUX 1 INPUT

DIGITAL

RLVIDEO

S-VIDEO

AUDIO

VIDEO

or S-VIDEO

• When a monitor is connected to the COMPONENT VIDEO MONITOR OUT terminal of the SR7001

AV SURROUND RECEIVER SR8001

INPUT SELECTOR

PURE DIRECT

DSD

SURROUND MODE AUTO

PURE DIRECTTHX

STANDBY

POWER ON/OFF

PHONES

VOLUME

DOWN

MULTI

BAND

SPEAKER

MEMORY CLEAR

MULTI

T-MODE

7.1CH INPUT

DISPLAY

SPEAKERS

MultEQ

A/B

ENTER

EXIT

AUX 1 INPUT

DIGITAL

RLVIDEO

S-VIDEO

AUDIO

MIC

VIDEO

or S-VIDEO

component

or component

HDMI

Notes:

• The HDMI video signal input from the playback device is not output from the COMPONENT VIDEO MONITOR OUT terminal of the SR7001.

Notes of OSD menu system:

• The setup menu can be displayed through all video out terminals (“HDMI”, “COMPONENT”, “SVIDEO” and “VIDEO”).

• OSD information is output only to the VIDEO and S-VIDEO MONITOR OUT terminals.

OSD information is also output when the video

conversion feature is on and the video signal input to the VIDEO or S-VIDEO input jack of the SR7001 is converted and output from the COMPONENT VIDEO or HDMI MONITOR OUT terminals.

I/P CONVERT

The video circuit of the SR7001 is equipped with an I/P conversion feature. When this feature is on, 480i/576i analog video signals (VIDEO, S-VIDEO or COMPONENT VIDEO) input from a playback device can be converted to 480p/576p and progressively output to the COMPONENT VIDEO or HDMI MONITOR OUT terminals of the SR7001. (For setting instructions, see page 34)

TEMPORARILY TURNING OFF THE SOUND

LIP.SYNC

TEST

7.1CH

DISP

MUTE

GUIDE

EXIT

CH.SEL

SURR

2 31

ATT

SPK-AB

5 64

OSD

SLEEP

To temporarily silence all speaker outputs such as when interrupted by a phone call, press the MUTE button on the remote. This will interrupt the output to all speakers and the head-phone jack, but it will not affect any recording or dubbing that may be in progress. When the system is muted, the display will show “MUTE” . Press the MUTE button again to return to normal operation.

USING THE SLEEP TIMER

TEST

7.1CH

DISP

CLEAR

To program the SR7001 for automatic standby, press the SLEEP button on the remote. Each press of the button will increase the time before shut down in the following sequence.

OFF 10 20 30 40

90 80 70 60 50

The sleep time will be shown for a few seconds in the display on the front panel, and it will count down until the time has elapsed. When the programmed sleep time has elapsed, the unit will automatically turn off. Note that the SLEEP indicator on the display will illuminate when the Sleep function is programmed. To cancel the Sleep function, press the SLEEP button until the display shows “SLEEP OFF” and the SLEEP indicator will disappear.

MUTE

GUIDE

EXIT

CH.SEL

SURR

2 31

ATT

SPK-AB

5 64

OSD

SLEEP9SLEEP

8097

THX

MEMO

SURROUND MODE

SURROUND

The SR7001/SR8001 is equipped with many surround modes. These are provided to reproduce a variety of surround sound effects, according to the content of the source to be played. The available surround modes may be restricted depending on the input signal and speaker setup.

SOURCE DIRECT

In the Source Direct mode, the tone control circuit Acoustic EQ. and bass management conﬁ guration are bypassed for full-range frequency response and the purist audio reproduction.

Notes:

• Speaker size is set to Front L/R = LARGE, Center = LARGE, Surround L/R = LARGE and Subwoofer = YES automatically. Tone controls, equalizer and additional processing are deactivated.

• When you use this mode with certain DVD and CD players, performing operations such as skip or stop may momentarily interrupt the output.

PURE DIRECT

The Pure Direct mode further reduces sources of noise in addition to effect of the Source Direct mode, by blocking output from the video jacks (VIDEO, S-VIDEO, COMPONENT VIDEO and HDMI) and turning the FL display off.

AUTO

When this mode is selected, the SR7001/SR8001 determines whether the digital input signal is Dolby Digital, Dolby Digital Surround EX, DTS, DTS-ES, DTS 96/24 or PCM audio. Surround EX & DTS-ES will operate for multichannel sources that have a Dolby Digital Surround EX or DTS-ES auto trigger ﬂ ag in the digital signal. When a Dolby Digital or DTS signal is input, the number of channels for which the corresponding signal is encoded will be played. Inputting a Dolby Digital two channel signal with Dolby surround status automatically subjects that signal to Pro Logic II x movie processing before play. PCM 96 kHz source material can be played in this mode.

Notes:

• When you use this mode with certain DVD and CD players, performing operations such as skip or stop may momentarily interrupt the output.

• When the signal is not decoded, the mode is changed to AUTO mode automatically. See page 43 to conﬁ rm the available decoding modes.

THX CINEMA

THX Cinema mode applies additional processing to Dolby Digital, DTS and Dolby Pro Logic multichannel, surround sources. The THX processing was developed by Lucasﬁ lm Ltd. to recreate the sound of top-quality theater. Use the THX Cinema mode for all movies on disc, tape or broadcast. In this mode, the THX Surround EX mode is not available.

THX SURROUND EX

Note:

• When playing Dolby Digital Surround EX-encoded software in 6.1 channels, it is required to select the THX Surround EX mode.

THX SELECT2 CINEMA

THX SELECT2 Cinema mode plays 5.1 movies using all 7.1 speakers giving you the best possible movie watching experience. In this mode, ASA processing blends the surround L/R speakers and surround back speakers, providing the optimal mix of ambient and directional surround sound. This mode permits the playback of a non Surround EX/ES-encoded 5.1 movie over a 7.1 system. DTS-ES (Matrix and 6.1 Discrete) and Dolby Digital Surround EX-encoded soundtracks will be automatically detected, if the appropriate ﬂ ag has been encoded. Some Dolby Digital Surround EX soundtracks are missing the digital ﬂ ag that allows automatic switching. If you know that the movie that you are watching is encoded in Surround EX, you can manually select the THX Surround EX playback mode, otherwise the THX SELECT2 Cinema mode will apply ASA processing to provide optimum replay.

THX MUSIC

For the replay of multichannel music, the THX Music mode should be selected. In this mode, THX ASA processing is applied to the surround channels of all

5.1-encoded music sources, such as DTS and Dolby Digital, to provide a wide, stable, rear soundstage. This mode is to be used with multichannel music sources such as DTS 5.1 music and Dolby Digital

5.1 music.

Notes:

• These modes are only available when you have setup SPEAKER SIZE menu system (i.e. 2 surround back speakers).

• These modes are only available when the input signal has surround left and surround right contents.

THX GAMES

For the replay of stereo and multichannel game audio the THX Games mode should be selected. In this mode, THX ASA processing is applied to the surround channels of all 5.1 and 2.0-encoded game sources such as analog, PCM, DTS and Dolby Digital. This accurately places all game audio surround information, providing a full 360-degree playback environment. THX Games mode is unique as it gives you a smooth transition of audio in all points of the surround ﬁ eld.

2 MODE

(Dolby Digital, Pro Logic IIx MOVIE, Pro Logic IIx MUSIC, Pro Logic IIx GAME)

This mode is used with source materials encoded in Dolby Digital and Dolby Surround.

DOLBY DIGITAL

This mode is enabled when playing source materials encoded in Dolby Digital. Playing multichannel-encoded 5.1 channel Dolby Digital sources provides 5 main audio channels (left, center, right, surround left and surround right) and a Low Frequency Effect channel. Dolby Digital EX decoding is not available in this mode.

Dolby Pro Logic II x has 5 modes: Pro Logic IIx MOVIE This mode provides 6.1 or 7.1 channel surround sound from Dolby Surround, encoded stereo movie soundtracks. Pro Logic IIx MUSIC This mode provides 6.1 or 7.1 channel surround sound from conventional stereo sources (analog or digital), such as CD, tape, FM, TV, stereo VCR, etc. Pro Logic IIx GAME This mode surround effects by routing them to the system’s subwoofer.

5.1ch + Pro Logic IIx Movie This mode provides 7.1 channel surround sound from

5.1 channel sources

5.1ch + Pro Logic IIx Music This mode provides 6.1 or 7.1 channel surround sound from 5.1 channel sources music soundtracks.

Notes:

restores the impact low-frequency

movie soundtracks

• Pro Logic IIx mode will decode as Pro Logic II mode when the SURR. B is set to “NONE” from SPEAKER SETUP menu. (See page 30)

• Pro Logic IIx mode is available for a 2 channel input signal which is encoded in Dolby Digital, HDCD or PCM format.

• PCM audio signals can be subjected to Pro Logic IIx processing when the sampling frequency is 32 kHz,

44.1 kHz or 48 kHz.

ENGLISH

EX/ES

This mode provides 6.1 channel surround for Dolby Digital EX, and DTS-ES-encoded source material such as DVD. This mode cannot be used when an analog input has been selected.

Dolby Digital EX In a movie theater, ﬁ lm soundtracks that have been encoded with Dolby Digital Surround EX technology are able to reproduce an extra channel which has been added during the mixing of the program. This channel, called surround back, places sounds behind the listener in addition to the currently available front left, front center, front right, surround right, surround left and subwoofer channels. This additional channel provides the opportunity for more detailed imaging behind the listener and brings more depth, spacious ambience and sound localization than ever before. Dolby Digital EX is not available in systems that do not have without surround back speaker(s).

DTS-ES (Discrete 6.1, Matrix 6.1) DTS-ES adds the surround center channel audio to the DTS 5.1 channel format to improve the acoustic positioning, and makes acoustic image movement more natural with the 6.1 channel reproduction. The SR7001/SR8001 incorporates a DTS-ESdecoder, which can handle DTS-ES Discreteencoded and DTS-ES Matrix-encoded program sources from DVD, etc. DTS-ES Discrete 6.1 features digital discrete recording of all channels, including the surround back channel(s), and higher quality audio reproduction. DTS-ES is not available in systems that do not have surround back speakers.

dts

dts, Neo:6 Cinema, Neo:6 Music This mode is for DTS-encoded source materials such as laserdisc, CD and DVD. Neo:6 is for some 2 channel sources.

dts

This mode is enabled when playing source materials encoded in dts multichannel. Playing multichannel encoded-5.1 channel dts sources provides five main audio channels (left, center, right, surround left and surround right) and a Low Frequency Effects channel. dts-ES decoding is not available in this mode. The DTS mode cannot be used when an analog input has been selected.

Neo:6 Cinema, Neo:6 Music

This mode decodes 2 channel signals into 6 channel signals using high-accuracy digital matrix technology. The DTS Neo:6 decoder has near-discrete properties in the frequency characteristics of the channels as well as in channel separation. According to the signals to be played back, DTS Neo:6 uses either the Neo:6 Cinema mode optimized for movie playback or the Neo:6 Music mode optimized for music playback.

Notes:

The Neo:6 mode is available for 2 channel input

• signals which are encoded in Dolby Digital, HDCD or PCM format.

• PCM audio signals can be subjected to Neo:6 processing when the sampling frequency is 32 kHz,

44.1 kHz or 48 kHz.

MULTI CH. ST

This mode is used to create a wider, deeper and more natural soundstage from two channel source material. This is done by feeding the left channel signal to both the left front and left surround speakers and the right channel signal to both the right front and right surround speakers. Additionally, the center channel reproduces a mix of the right and left channels.

CIRCLE SURROUND II

-CINEMA, CSII-MUSIC, CSII-MONO)

(CS

Circle Surround is designed to enable multichannel surround sound playback of non-encoded and multichannel encoded material. Backward compatibility provides listeners with up to

6.1 channels of surround performance from an entire collection of music and ﬁ lm, including broadcast, videotape and stereo recorded music. Depending on source material, you can select CSII - Cinema mode, CSII -Music mode or CSII-Mono mode.

Notes:

• The CS II mode is available for 2 channel input signals which are encoded in Dolby Digital, HDCD or PCM format.

• PCM audio signals can be subjected to CS II processing when the sampling frequency is 32 kHz,

44.1 kHz or 48 kHz.

Dolby Virtual Speaker

Dolby Virtual Speaker technology uses proprietary technology of Dolby Laboratories to create a virtual surround sound ﬁ eld using only two speakers for the front channels, allowing the user to experience sound as if surround speakers were actually being used.

STEREO

This mode bypasses all surround processing. In stereo program sources, the left and right channels play normally when PCM audio or analog stereo is input. With Dolby Digital and DTS sources, the 5.1 channels are converted to two channel stereo. 96 kHz PCM source material can be played back in stereo mode.

CAUTION

Note for DTS

•

To connected DVD player, laserdisc player or CD player needs to support DTS digital output. You may not be able to play some DTS source signals from certain CD players and LD players even if you connect the player to the SR7001/SR8001 digitally. This is because the digital signal has been processed (such as the output level, sampling frequency or frequency response), and the SR7001/ SR8001 cannot recognize the signal as DTS data.

• Depending on the player used, DTS play may produce a short noise. This is not a malfunction.

• While signals from a DTS laserdisc or CD are playing in another surround mode, you cannot switch to digital input or from digital input to analog input from the INPUT SETUP in the MAIN MENU or by pressing the A/D button.

• You can not listen to DTS-encoded software in a multiroom.

The outputs for VCR 1 OUT, DSS/VCR 2 OUT,

• TAPE OUT and CD-R OUT output analog audio signals only. Do not record from CDs or LDs that support DTS using these outputs. If you do, the DTS-encoded signal will be recorded as noise.

Note or Dolby Digital Surround EX

•

When playing Dolby Digital Surround EX-encoded software in 6.1 channels, it is required to set the EX/ES mode.

• Note that some Dolby Digital Surround EX-encoded software does not contain the identiﬁ cation signal. In this case, set the EX/ES mode manually.

Note for 96 kHz/192 kHz PCM audio

The AUTO, Pure Direct, and Stereo modes can be

• used when playing PCM signals with a sampling frequency of 96/192 kHz (such as from DVD-Video/ Audio discs).

•

Certain DVD player models inhibit digital output. For details, refer to the player’s operation manual.

•

Some DVD discs feature copy protection. When using such disc, 96 kHz PCM signal are not output from the DVD player. For details, refer to the player’s operation manual.

Note for HDCD

•

HDCD is effective only through digital input.

•

You may not be able to play some HDCD source signals from certain CD players if you connect the player to the SR7001/SR8001 digitally. This is because the digital signal has been processed (such as the output level, sampling frequency or frequency response) and the SR7001/SR8001 cannot recognize the signal as HDCD data.

The relationship between the selected surround mode and the input signal

The surround mode is selected with the surround mode selector on the SR7001 or the remote control unit. However, the sound you hear is subject to the relationship between the selected surround mode and the input signal. That relationship is as follows:

Surround Mode Input Signal Decoding

AUTO

SOURCE DIRECT PURE DIRECT

EX/ES

DOLBY (PLIIx movie) (PLIIx music) (PLIIx game)

DTS (Neo:6 Cinema) (Neo:6 Music)

CSII Cinema CSII Music CSII Mono

STEREO

Dolby Surr.EX Dolby Digital EX Dolby D (5.1ch) Dolby Digital 5.1 Dolby D (2ch) Dolby Digital 2.0 Dolby D (2ch Surr) Pro Logic IIx movie DTS-ES DTS-ES DTS 96/24 DTS-96/24 DTS (5.1ch) DTS 5.1 Multi Ch-PCM Multi Ch-PCM Multi Ch-PCM 96kHz Multi Ch-PCM 96kHz SA-CD (5.1ch) Multi Ch-PCM SA-CD (2ch) PCM (Stereo) PCM (Audio) PCM (Stereo) PCM 96kHz PCM (Stereo 96kHz) HDCD HDCD Analog Stereo

7.1ch input Multi Ch Dolby Surr.EX Dolby Digital EX Dolby D (5.1ch) Dolby Digital 5.1 Dolby D (2ch) Dolby Digital 2.0 Dolby D (2ch Surr) Pro Logic IIx movie DTS-ES DTS-ES DTS 96/24 DTS-96/24 DTS (5.1ch) DTS 5.1 Multi Ch-PCM Multi Ch-PCM Multi Ch-PCM 96kHz Multi Ch-PCM 96kHz SA-CD (5.1ch) SA-CD (5.1ch) SA-CD (2ch) SA-CD (2ch) PCM (Audio) PCM (Stereo) PCM 96kHz PCM (Stereo 96kHz) HDCD HDCD Analog Stereo

7.1ch input Multi Ch Dolby Surr.EX Dolby Digital EX Dolby D (5.1ch) Dolby Digital EX DTS-ES DTS-ES DTS (5.1ch) DTS-ES Multi-PCM Multi Ch-PCM + Dolby EX SA-CD (5.1ch) Multi Ch-PCM + Dolby EX Dolby Surr.EX Dolby Digital 5.1 Dolby D (5.1ch) Dolby Digital 5.1 Dolby D (5.1ch) Dolby Digital 5.1 + PLIIx Dolby D (2ch) Pro Logic II x Dolby D (2ch Surr) Pro Logic IIx Multi Ch-PCM Multi Ch-PCM + PLII x SA-CD (5.1ch) Multi Ch-PCM + PLII x SA-CD (2ch) Pro Logic IIx PCM (Audio) Pro Logic II x HDCD Pro Logic IIx Analog Pro Logic IIx DTS-ES DTS 5.1 DTS 96/24 DTS-96/24 DTS (5.1ch) DTS 5.1 Dolby D (2ch) Neo:6 Dolby D (2ch Surr) Neo:6 SA-CD (2ch) Neo:6 PCM(Audio) Neo:6 HDCD Neo:6 Analog Neo:6 Dolby D (2ch) CSII Dolby D (2ch Surr) CSII SA-CD (2ch) CSII PCM(Audio) CSII HDCD CSII Analog CSII Dolby Surr.EX Stereo Dolby D (5.1ch) Stereo Dolby D (2ch) Stereo Dolby D (2ch Surr) Stereo DTS-ES Stereo DTS 96/24 Stereo DTS (5.1ch) Stereo Multi Ch-PCM Stereo Multi Ch-PCM 96kHz Stereo SA-CD (5.1ch) Stereo SA-CD (2ch) Stereo PCM (Audio) Stereo PCM 96kHz Stereo HDCD Stereo Analog Stereo

Output Channel Front information display

SLSRSBL

SubW

L/R C

OOOOO OOO-O O OOOOO OOOOO OOO-O OOO-O OOO-O OOO-O OOO-O O O O O O OOOOO OOOOO OOO-O O OOOOO OOOOO OOO-O OOO-O OOO-O OOO-O OOO-O O O O O O OOOOO OOOOO OOOOO OOOOO OOOOO OOOOO OOOOO OOO-O OOO-O OOOOO OOOOO OOOOO OOOOO OOOOO OOOOO OOOOO OOOOO OOOOO OOO-O OOO-O OOO-O OOOOO OOOOO OOOOO OOOOO OOOOO OOOOO OOOOO OOOOO OOOOO OOOOO OOOOO OOOOO O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O

SBR

---

---OSA-CD L, R

---OPCM L, R

---OPCM, HDCD L, R

---OANALOG -

---

---OSA-CD L, R

----PCM L, R

- - - - PCM, HDCD L, R

----ANALOG -

---

---Odts, ES L, C, R, SL, SR, S, LFE

---Odts 96/24 L, C, R, SL, SR, LFE

---Odts L, C, R, SL, SR, LFE

---OM-PCM L, C, R, SL, SR, LFE

---OSA-CD L, C, R, SL, SR, LFE

---OSA-CD L, R

---OPCM L, R

---OPCM, HDCD L, R

---OANALOG -

Signal format indicators Channel status

2 DIGITAL EX 2 DIGITAL

2 DIGITAL 2 DIGITAL 2 SURROUND

dts, ES L, C, R, SL, SR, S, LFE dts 96/24 L, C, R, SL, SR, LFE dts L, C, R, SL, SR, LFE M-PCM L, C, R, SL, SR, LFE M-PCM L, C, R, SL, SR, LFE SA-CD L, C, R, SL, SR, LFE

ANALOG -

2 DIGITAL EX 2 DIGITAL

2 DIGITAL 2 DIGITAL 2 SURROUND

dts, ES L, C, R, SL, SR, S, LFE dts 96/24 L, C, R, SL, SR, LFE dts L, C, R, SL, SR, LFE M-PCM L, C, R, SL, SR, LFE M-PCM L, C, R, SL, SR, LFE SA-CD L, C, R, SL, SR, LFE

ANALOG -

2 DIGITAL EX 2 DIGITAL

dts, ES L, C, R, SL, SR, S, LFE dts L, C, R, SL, SR, LFE M-PCM L, C, R, SL, SR, LFE SA-CD L, C, R, SL, SR, LFE

2 DIGITAL EX 2 DIGITAL 2 DIGITAL 2 DIGITAL 2 DIGITAL 2 SURROUND

M-PCM L, C, R, SL, SR, LFE SA-CD L, C, R, SL, SR, LFE SA-CD L, R PCM L, R PCM, HDCD L, R ANALOG dts, ES L, C, R, SL, SR, S, LFE dts 96/24 L, C, R, SL, SR, LFE dts L, C, R, SL, SR, LFE

2 DIGITAL 2 DIGITAL 2 SURROUND

SA-CD L, R PCM L, R PCM, HDCD L, R ANALOG -

2 DIGITAL 2 DIGITAL 2 SURROUND

SA-CD L, R PCM L, R PCM, HDCD L, R ANALOG -

2 DIGITAL EX

2 DIGITAL

2 DIGITAL 2 SURROUND

L, C, R, SL, SR, S, LFE L, C, R, SL, SR, LFE L, R L, R, S

L, C, R, SL, SR, S, LFE L, C, R, SL, SR, LFE

L, C, R, SL, SR, S, LFE L, C, R, SL, SR, LFE L, C, R, SL, SR, LFE L, R L, R, S

L, R L, R, S

L, C, R, SL, SR, S, LFE L, C, R, SL, SR, LFE L, R L, R, S

ENGLISH

Surround Mode Input Signal Decoding

Dolby Virtual Speaker

Multi Ch. Stereo

Dolby H.P Dolby Surr.EX Dolby H.P

THX (THX Games)

THX Select2 (THX EX) (THX Music) (THX Games)

Dolby Surr.EX Dolby Virtual Speaker Dolby D (5.1ch) Dolby Virtual Speaker Dolby D (2ch) Dolby Virtual Speaker Dolby D (2ch Surr) Dolby Virtual Speaker DTS-ES Dolby Virtual Speaker DTS 96/24 Dolby Virtual Speaker DTS (5.1ch) Dolby Virtual Speaker Multi Ch-PCM Dolby Virtual Speaker SA-CD (5.1ch) Dolby Virtual Speaker SA-CD (2ch) Dolby Virtual Speaker PCM (Audio) Dolby Virtual Speaker HDCD Dolby Virtual Speaker Analog Dolby Virtual Speaker Dolby Surr.EX Dolby Digital EX Dolby D (5.1ch) Dolby Digital 5.1 Dolby D (2ch) Multi Channel Stereo Dolby D (2ch Surr) Multi Channel Stereo DTS-ES DTS-ES DTS 96/24 DTS-96/24 DTS (5.1ch) DTS 5.1 Multi Ch-PCM Multi Ch-PCM Multi Ch-PCM 96kHz Multi Ch-PCM 96kHz SA-CD (5.1ch) Multi Ch-PCM SA-CD (2ch) Multi Channel Stereo PCM (Audio) Multi Channel Stereo HDCD Multi Channel Stereo Analog Multi Channel Stereo

Dolby D (5.1ch) Dolby H.P Dolby D (2ch) Dolby H.P Dolby D (2ch Surr) Dolby H.P DTS-ES Dolby H.P DTS 96/24 Dolby H.P DTS (5.1ch) Dolby H.P Multi Ch-PCM Dolby H.P SA-CD (5.1ch) Dolby H.P SA-CD (2ch) Dolby H.P PCM (Audio) Dolby H.P HDCD Dolby H.P Analog Dolby H.P Dolby Surr.EX Dolby Digital + THX Surround EX Dolby D (5.1ch) Dolby Digital 5.1+ THX 5.1 Dolby D (2ch) Pro Logic II x movie + THX Dolby D (2ch Surr) Pro Logic IIx movie + THX DTS-ES DTS-ES + THX DTS (5.1ch) DTS + THX 5.1 Multi Ch-PCM Multi Ch-PCM + THX5.1 SA-CD (5.1ch) Multi Ch-PCM + THX5.1 SA-CD (2ch) Pro Logic IIx movie + THX PCM (Audio) Pro Logic II x movie + THX HDCD Pro Logic IIx movie + THX Analog Pro Logic IIx movie + THX Dolby Surr.EX Dolby Digital + THX Surround EX Dolby D (5.1ch) Dolby Digital 5.1+ THX Select2 Cinema Dolby D (2ch) Pro Logic II x movie + THX Dolby D (2ch Surr) Pro Logic IIx movie + THX DTS-ES DTS-ES + THX DTS (5.1ch) DTS + THX Select2 Cinema Multi Ch-PCM Multi Ch-PCM + THX Select2 Cinema SA-CD (5.1ch) Multi Ch-PCM + THX Select2 Cinema SA-CD (2ch) Pro Logic IIx movie + THX PCM (Audio) Pro Logic II x movie + THX HDCD Pro Logic IIx movie + THX Analog Pro Logic IIx movie + THX

Output Channel Front information display

SLSRSBL

SubW

L/R C

O O O O O O O O O O O O O OOOOO OOO-O OOOOO OOOOO OOOOO OOO-O OOO-O OOO-O OOO-O OOO-O OOOOO OOOOO OOOOO OOOOO O O O O O O O O O O O O O OOOOO OOO-O OOOOO OOOOO OOOOO OOO-O OOO-O OOO-O OOOOO OOOOO OOOOO OOOOO OOOOO OOOOO OOOOO OOOOO OOOOO OOOOO OOOOO OOOOO OOOOO OOOOO OOOOO OOOOO

SBR

----

- - - - dts, ES L, C, R, SL, SR, S, LFE

- - - - dts 96/24 L, C, R, SL, SR, LFE

- - - - dts L, C, R, SL, SR, LFE

- - - - M-PCM L, C, R, SL, SR, LFE

- - - - SA-CD L, C, R, SL, SR, LFE

----SA-CD L, R

----PCM L, R

- - - - PCM, HDCD L, R

----ANALOG -

----

- - - - dts, ES L, C, R, SL, SR, S, LFE

- - - - dts 96/24 L, C, R, SL, SR, LFE

- - - - dts L, C, R, SL, SR, LFE

- - - - M-PCM L, C, R, SL, SR, LFE

- - - - SA-CD L, C, R, SL, SR, LFE

----SA-CD L, R

----PCM L, R

- - - - PCM, HDCD L, R

----ANALOG -

Signal format indicators Channel status

2 DIGITAL EX 2 DIGITAL 2 DIGITAL 2 DIGITAL 2 SURROUND

dts, ES L, C, R, SL, SR, S, LFE dts 96/24 L, C, R, SL, SR, LFE dts L, C, R, SL, SR, LFE M-PCM L, C, R, SL, SR, LFE M-PCM L, C, R, SL, SR, LFE SA-CD L, C, R, SL, SR, LFE SA-CD L, R PCM L, R PCM, HDCD L, R ANALOG -

2 DIGITAL EX 2 DIGITAL 2 DIGITAL 2 DIGITAL 2 SURROUND

dts, ES L, C, R, SL, SR, S, LFE dts L, C, R, SL, SR, LFE M-PCM L, C, R, SL, SR, LFE SA-CD L, C, R, SL, SR, LFE SA-CD L, R PCM L, R PCM, HDCD L, R ANALOG -

2 DIGITAL EX 2 DIGITAL 2 DIGITAL 2 DIGITAL 2 SURROUND

dts, ES L, C, R, SL, SR, S, LFE dts L, C, R, SL, SR, LFE M-PCM L, C, R, SL, SR, LFE SA-CD L, C, R, SL, SR, LFE SA-CD L, R PCM L, R PCM, HDCD L, R ANALOG -

L, C, R, SL, SR, S, LFE L, C, R, SL, SR, LFE L, R L, R, S

Notes:

• Dolby Digital (2 channel L/R): Speakers for signal with Dolby Surround are fully equipped.

• No sound is outputs from the surround speaker, center speaker and subwoofer if the DVD disc has no surround data.

Abbreviations L/R : Front speakers C : Center speaker SL/SR : Surround speakers SBL/SBR : Surround back speakers SubW : Subwoofer

OTHER FUNCTION

TV AUTO ON/OFF FUNCTION

This function allows the component connected to the TV-VIDEO in jack to control the power (ON/OFF) to the SR7001.

AUTO POWER ON

1. Be sure the TV auto mode is ENABLED. (Refer to page 34: PREFERENCE)

Connect your TV TUNER (etc) to the TV-

VIDEO in terminal. Be sure to connect the VIDEO input.

Turn OFF the power to the TV TUNER and the

SR7001.

Turn ON the TV TUNER and tune in a receivable

station.

When the station is received, the SR7001 turns

ON and TV is selected automatically.

AUTO POWER OFF

1. In the above situation, turn the TV TUNER OFF or select a channel that does not contain any broadcast.

The power to the SR7001 switches to STANDBY

after approx. 5 minutes.

Notes:

• AUTO POWER OFF is canceled if the SR7001 is set to a source other than TV.

The function reactivates when TV is selected again.

• Some TV broadcasts may cause the TV AUTO FUNCTION to turn ON.

• The S-Video terminal does not support “TV AUTO ON/OFF” function.

ATTENUATION TO ANALOG INPUT SIGNAL

LIP.SYNC

TEST

7.1CH

DISP

CLEAR

If the selected analog audio input signal is greater than the capable level of internal processing, the “PEAK” indicator will light up on the front display. If this happens, you should press the ATT button on the remote. “ATT ” indicator will be illuminated when this function is activated. The signal-input level is reduced by about half. Attenuation will not work with the output signal of TAPE-OUT, CD/CD-R, VCR1-OUT and DSS/VCR2-OUT. This function is memorized for each individual input source.

LISTENING THROUGH HEADPHONES

This jack may be used to listen to the SR7001’s output through a pair of headphones. Be certain that the headphones have a standard 1/4” stereo phono plug. (Note that the speakers will automatically be turned off when the headphone jack is in use.)

Note:

• The surround mode returns to the previous setting as soon as the plug is removed from the jack.

MUTE

GUIDE

EXIT

CH.SEL

SURR

2 31

ATT

SPK-AB

ATT

5 64

OSD

SLEEP

8097

THX

MEMO

AV SURROUND RECEIVER SR8001

INPUT SELECTOR

STANDBY

POWER ON/OFF

PURE DIRECT

DISP MULTI AUTO TUNED ST SP

SURR DIRECT

AUTO

SLEEP

DSD

SURROUND

MULTI

MODE AUTO

SPEAKER

MULTI

7.1CH INPUT

PURE DIRECT THX

PHONES

DOLBY HEADPHONE MODE

This feature simulates the waveforms of the actual sounds heard from the speakers. When headphones are used, the MENU button automatically switches to the Dolby headphone mode. The OSD that appears when the MENU button is pressed is shown below.

HEAD PHONE

DOLBY HP MODE : DH SURROUND : PL CINEMA

L LEVEL : +10dB R LEVEL : 0dB

DOLBY HP (Headphone) MODE can be selected with the left and right cursor buttons. BYPASS → DH (DOLBY Headphone) → BYPASS

BYPASS: Bypasses the Dolby headphone mode

and delivers ordinary 2-channel stereo.

DH: Dolby Headphone is a signal processing

system that delivers a sound similar to room speakers.

It makes it possible to experience

the volume and space of a 5-channel surround system using ordinary stereo headphones.

When the PURE DIRECT mode is selected, Dolby surround processing is bypassed and “✽✽✽” is displayed as the mode indication.

DISC 6.

The surround mode can be selected when the modes in DH is selected.

L/R LEVEL can be set in the ±12 dB range.

Notes:

• The surround mode returns to the previous setting as soon as the plug is removed from the jack.

• TONE cannot be set when the mode in DH is selected.

• The Dolby Headphone function will not work when 32 or 96 kHz PCM digital signals are input.

VIDEO ON/OFF

When no video signal is connected to the SR7001 or a DVD, etc., is connected directly to your TV, the unnecessary video circuit can be turned off by selecting the “VIDEO OFF” setting. To select video off, press the AMP button and press the > button until PAGE 4 is displayed. Press the

V-OFF button.

PAGE

AUX1

LIGHT

RC8001SR

Learning Remote Controller

AMP

AUX2

AMP

ND RECEIVER SR8001

NES

PURE DIRECT

DSD

SURROUND

MODE AUTO

PURE DIRECT THX

AUTO

MULTI

SPEAKER

MULTI

7.1CH INPUT

LCR

LFE

AAC

PCM

SL S SR

MEMORY CLEAR

BAND

T-MODE

DISPLAY

SPEAKERS

MultEQ

ENTER

A/B

EXIT

MIC

USE

TUNERCDCD-R

TAPE

SURROUND

V-OFFDISP MULTI AUTO TUNED ST SPKR A B

PEAK ANALOG

ATT

DIGITAL

SURR DIRECT

NIGHT

SLEEP

DISC 6.1 MTX 6.1 EQ

ENGLISH

DISPLAY MODE

AV SURROUND RECEIVER SR8001

PHONES

PURE DIRECT

DSD

SURROUND

MODE AUTO

PURE DIRECT THX

SURR DIRECT

SLEEP

DISC 6.1 MTX 6.1 EQ

AUTO

MULTI

SPEAKER

MULTI T-MODE

7.1CH INPUT

SURROUND

V-OFFDISP MULTI AUTO TUNED ST SPKR A B

PEAK ANALOG

ATT

DIGITAL

NIGHT

LCR

LFE

AAC

PCM

SL S SR

BAND

MEMORY

DISPLAY

MultEQ

ENTER

EXIT

MIC

CLEAR

LIP.SYNC

GUIDE

TEST

CH.SEL

7.1CH

ATT

DISP

OSD

DISP

THX

You can select the display mode for the front display of the SR7001. To select this mode, press the DISPLAY on the remote control or the front panel. When this button is pressed, the display mode is switched in the following sequence. Input Mode → Surround Mode → Auto display OFF → Display OFF → Normal Mode → Input Mode

Normal Mode:

Displays the selected input function. If the function has been renamed using the Function Rename feature (see page 25), the renamed name appears on the display.

Input Mode:

Displays the input mode set via the Function Input Setup feature (see page 24).

Surround Mode:

Displays the status of the selected surround mode.

Auto Display Off mode:

The display is off. But, if you make a change to the unit such as the input or surround mode, the display will show that change, then go back to off after about 3 seconds. When changing the volume, it is not displayed.

Display Off mode:

The display is off completely.

Note:

• Only the DISP indicator will be illuminated on the front display in display off condition.

SELECTING ANALOG AUDIO INPUT OR DIGITAL AUDIO INPUT

MUTE

EXIT

SURR

2 31

SPK-AB

5 64

SLEEP

8097

MEMO

USE

TUNER

TAPE

If you have already assigned the digital inputs, you can temporarily select the audio input mode for each input source as following procedures. Press the AMP button and press the > button until PAGE4 is displayed. Press the A/D (D3) button. When this button is pressed, the input mode is switched in the following sequence.

PAGE

AUX1

LIGHT

RC8001SR

Learning Remote Controller

CD-R

AMP

AUX2

AMP

RECORDING AN ANALOG SOURCE

In normal operation, the audio or video source selected for listening through the SR7001 is sent to the record outputs. This means that any program you are watching or listening to may be recorded simply by placing machines connected to the outputs for TAPE OUT, CD/CDR OUT, VCR1 OUT, and DSS/VCR2 OUT in the record mode.

To record the input source signal you are currently watching or listening to

AV SURROUND RECEIVER SR8001

INPUT SELECTOR

STANDBY

POWER ON/OFF

PURE DIRECT

DISP MULTI AUTO TUNED

SURR DIRECT

AUTO

SLEEP

DSD

MULTI

SURROUND

MODE AUTO

SPEAK

MULTI

7.1CH INPUT

PURE DIRECT THX

PHONES

TUNER

TAPE

AUX1

LIGHT

RC8001SR

Learning Remote Controller

DSS

VCRDVD

CD-R

AMP

AUX2

Auto → HDMI → Digital → Analog → Auto

Auto mode:

The types of signals being input to the digital and analog input jacks for the selected input source are detected automatically. If no digital signal is being input, the analog input jacks are selected automatically.

HDMI mode:

HDMI mode can be selected only when an HDMI input has been assigned as an input source. When “HDMI AUDIO” under PREFERENCE of the SETUP MENU is set to “THROUGH”, the HDMI mode cannot be selected.

Digital mode:

The input signal is ﬁ xed to an assigned digital input terminal.

1. Select the input source to record by turning the

INPUT FUNCTION SELECTOR knob on the front panel or simply press the input selector buttons on the remote.

The input source is now selected and you may

watch or listen to it as desired.

The currently selected input source signal

is output to the TAPE OUT, CD/CDR OUT, VCR1 OUT, and DSS/VCR2 OUT outputs for

recording.

Start recording to the recording component as

desired.

Analog mode:

Recording the video from one source and the audio from another

You can add the sound from one source to the video of another source to make your own video recordings. Below is an example of recording the sound from a compact disc player connected to CD IN and the video from a video camera connected to VCR1 to video cassette recorder connected to the DSS/VCR2 OUT jack.

DSS

VCRDVD

TUNER

CD-R

AMP

AUX2

AUX1

TAPE

AUX1

LIGHT

RC8001SR

Learning Remote Controller

1. Switch the video output source to VCR1 by

simply pressing the input selector buttons on the remote.

Switch the audio input source to CD by simply

pressing the input selector buttons on the remote.

Now “CD” has been selected as the audio input

source and “VCR1” as the video input source.

Notes:

• If you change the input source during recording, you will record the signals from the newly selected input source.

• You cannot record the surround effects.

• Digital input signals are only output to the digital outputs. There is no conversion from digital to analog .

When connecting CD players and other digital

components, do not connect only the digital terminals, but the analog ones as well.

The analog input jacks are selected.

This selection is temporary and will not be stored in memory. To store changes to the input mode, select “1. INPUT SETUP” from the MAIN MENU. (See page 24)

SPEAKER A/B

CLEAR

LIP.SYNC

TEST

7.1CH

DISP

MUTE

GUIDE

EXIT

CH.SEL

SURR

2 31

ATT

SPK-AB

5 64

OSD

SLEEP

8097

THX

MEMO

LTI AUTO TUNED ST SPKR A B

SURR DIRECT

AUTO

MULTI

SPEAKER

MULTI

7.1CH INPUT

V-OFF

DISC 6.1 MTX 6.1 EQ

ENTER

PEAK ANALOG

NIGHT

BAND

SURROUND

ATT

DIGITAL

LCR

LFE

AAC

PCM

SL S SR

MEMORY CLEAR

T-MODE

DISPLAY

SPEAKERS

MultEQ

A/B

EXIT

MIC

VOLUME

DOWN

AUX 1 INPUT

DIGITAL

VIDEO

S-VIDEO

SR7001 has speaker system - A and speaker system- B for front L/R channels. You can select these systems by pressing

SPEAKERS A/B button on the front panel or SPKAB on the remote.

7.1 CH INPUT

The SR7001 is equipped for future expansion through the use of Multi channel Super Audio CD multichannel player or DVD-Audio player. When this is selected, the input signals connected to the L(front left), R (front right), CENTER, SL (surround left), SR (surround right) and SBL (surround back left) and SBR (surround back right) channels of the 7.1 CH. In jacks are output directly to the front (left and right), center, surround (left and right) and surround back speaker systems as well as the pre-out jacks without passing through the surround circuitry. In addition, the signal input to the SW (subwoofer) jack is output to the PRE OUT SW (subwoofer) jack. When 7.1 CH. INPUT is selected, the last video input used remains routed to the Monitor Outputs. This permits simultaneous viewing with video sources

1. 2.

AV SURROUND RECEIVER SR8001

INPUT SELECTOR

STANDBY

POWER ON/OFF

SURROUND

DIGITAL

LCR

LFE

SL S SR

MEMORY CLEAR

SPEAKERS

MultEQ A/B

MIC

1. Select a desired Video source to decide the

Press the 7.1 CH INPUT button on the front

If it is necessary to adjust the output level of

Adjust the speaker output levels so that you can

The subwoofer can be adjusted between –18

These adjustments result will be stored to 7.1

Adjust the main volume with the MAIN VOLUME

PURE DIRECT

DISP MULTI AUTO TUNED ST SPKR

SURR DIRECT

SLEEP

DISC 6.1

AUTO

DSD

SURROUND

MULTI

MODE AUTO

SPEAKER

MULTI

7.1CH INPUT

PURE DIRECT THX

PHONES

CLEAR

TEST

7.1CH

DISP

VOLUME

DOWN

DIGITAL

AUX 1 INPUT

RLVIDEO

S-VIDEO

AUDIO

VOL

LIP.SYNC

MUTE

GUIDE

EXIT

CH.SEL

SURR

CH.SEL

2 31

ATT

SPK-AB

5 64

OSD

SLEEP

8097

THX

MEMO

routed video signal to the Monitor Outputs.

panel or press 7.1 CH on the remote to switch the 7.1 channel input.

each channel, press the CH.SEL button on the remote.

hear the same sound level from each speaker at the listening position. For the front left, front right, center, surround left, surround right and surround back speakers, the output levels can be adjusted between –12 to +12 dB.

and +12 dB.

CH. INPUT memory.

knob or the VOL buttons on the remote.

To cancel the 7.1 CH. INPUT setting, press the 7.1 CH INPUT button on the front panel or press 7.1 CH on the remote.

Notes:

• When the 7.1 CH. Input is in use, you may not select a surround mode, as the external decoder determines processing.

• In addition, there is no signal at the record outputs when the 7.1 CH. Input is in use.

AUX2 INPUT

If you don’t need to connect 7.1 Ch. input terminals with multi channel decoder, L(front left) and R (front right) inputs terminals are available as AUX2 input. In this case, You can connect additional audio source to AUX2 as other audio input terminals.

AV SURROUND RECEIVER SR8001

INPUT SELECTOR

STANDBY

POWER ON/OFF

PURE DIRECT

DISP MULTI AUTO

SURR

AUTO

SLEEP

DSD

SURROUND

MODE AUTO

MULTI

7.1CH

PURE DIRECT THX

PHONES

LIP.SYNC

Depending on the image device (TV, monitor, projector, etc.) connected to the SR7001, a time lag can occur between image signal processing and audio signal processing. Though minor, this time lag can interfere with movie and music enjoyment. The LIP.SYNC feature delays the audio signal with respect to the image signal output from the SR7001 to correct the time lag between the sound and image. It can be operated with the “LIP.SYNC” and 1 and 2 cursor buttons of the remote controller. Set the remote controller to the AMP mode before operating the LIP.SYNC feature. The initial setting is OFF (0 ms).The time lag can be adjusted in 10 ms steps up to 200 ms. Watch the picture on the image device (i.e., TV, monitor, projector, etc.) as you adjust the time lag.

Note:

• The LIP.SYSNC feature turns OFF (0 ms) in the SOURCE/PURE DIRECT mode. When the SOURCE/PURE DIRECT mode is deactivated, the set value of the LIP.SYSNC feature is automatically restored.

VOL

LIP.SYNC

MUTE

GUIDE

EXIT

CH.SEL

SURR

2 31

ATT

SPK-AB

5 64

OSD

SLEEP

8097

THX

MEMO

CLEAR

TEST

7.1CH

DISP

ENGLISH

SOURCE

BASIC OPERATION

(TUNER)

To operate the unit from the remote control, press the TUNER button on the remote control so that the tuner mode is engaged.

LISTENING TO THE TUNER

Frequency scan step for AM is selectable. Default setup is 10 kHz step, if your country’s standard is 9 kHz step, Press BAND button on the front panel or TUNER button on the remote more than 5 seconds. Scan step will change.

Note:

Preset memory for the tuner will clear by changing

• this setup.

AUTO TUNING

PAGE

AUX1

LIGHT

RC8001SR

Learning Remote Controller

PAGE

AUX1

LIGHT

RC8500SR

Learning Remote Controller

VOL

DSS

VCRDVD

CD-R

AMP

AUX2

VCRDVD

CD-R

AUX2

DSS

AMP

URE DIRECT

DSD

PURE DIRECT THX

SURROUND

POWER ON/OFF

SLEEP

MODE AUTO

AV SURROUND RECEIVER SR8001

INPUT SELECTOR

STANDBY

PHONES

3. 2.

V-OFFDISP MULTI AUTO TUNED ST SPKR A B

PEAK ANALOG

SURR DIRECT

NIGHT

DISC 6.1 MTX 6.1 EQ

AUTO

MULTI

SPEAKER

MULTI

7.1CH INPUT

ENTER

USE

PURE DIRECT

DISP MULTI

SLEEPSAUTO

DSD

SURROUND

MODE AUTO

PURE DIRECT THX

SURROUND

ATT

DIGITAL

LCR

LFE

AAC

PCM

SL S SR

MEMORY CLEAR

BAND

T-MODE

DISPLAY

SPEAKERS

MultEQ

A/B

EXIT

MIC

TUNER

TAPE

TUNER

TAPE

USE

(Using the SR7001)

Turn the INPUT SELECTOR knob to select

“TUNER”.

Press the BAND button to select either FM or

AM.

Press the 3 or 4 cursor buttons on the front

Panel for more than 1 second to start the auto tuning function.

4. Automatic searching begins then stops when a station is tuned in.

(Using the remote control unit)

1. To select tuner, Press the TUNER button twice within two second on the remote.

Press the > button until PAGE 1 is displayed.

Press the BAND (D5) button to select either

FM or AM.

Press the > button until PAGE 2 is displayed.

Press and hold the SCAN+ (D1) or SCAN– (D2)

button for 1 second or more.

6. Automatic searching begins then stops when a station is tuned in.

If tuning does not stop at the desired station, use to the “Manualtunin” operation.

MANUAL TUNING

USE

PAGE

AV SURROUND RECEIVER SR8001

INPUT SELECTOR

STANDBY

POWER ON/OFF

PURE DIRECT

DISP MULTI

SLEEPSAUTO

DSD

SURROUND

MODE AUTO

PURE DIRECT THX

PHONES

TUNERCDCD-R

TUNER

TAPE

AUX1

LIGHT

RC8500SR

Learning Remote Controller

VCRDVD

AUX2

VOL

DSS

AMP

URE DIRECT

DSD

SURROUND

PURE DIRECT THX

MODE AUTO

3. 2.

SURR DIRECT

SLEEP

DISC 6.1 MTX 6.1 EQ

AUTO

MULTI

SPEAKER

MULTI

7.1CH INPUT

ENTER

SURROUND

V-OFFDISP MULTI AUTO TUNED ST SPKR A B

PEAK ANALOG

ATT

DIGITAL

NIGHT

LCR

LFE

AAC

PCM

SL S SR

MEMORY CLEAR

BAND

T-MODE

DISPLAY

SPEAKERS

MultEQ

A/B

EXIT

MIC

USE

TUNER

TAPE

PAGE

AUX1

LIGHT

RC8500SR

Learning Remote Controller

DSS

VCRDVD

CD-R

AMP

AUX2

(Using the SR7001)

Turn the INPUT SELECTOR knob to select

“TUNER”.

Press the BAND button to select either FM or

AM.

Press the 3 or 4 cursor buttons on the front

Panel to select the desired station.

(Using the remote control unit)

To select tuner, press the TUNER button twice

within two seconds on the remote.

Press the > button until PAGE 1 is displayed.

Press the BAND (D5) button to select either

FM or AM.

Press the > button until PAGE 2 is displayed.

Press the SCAN+ (D1) or SCAN– (D2) button

to tune in the deseired station.

DIRECT FREQUENCY CALL

LIP.SYNC

SOURCE

USE

PAGE

VOL

TEST

7.1CH

DISP

CLEAR

TUNER

TAPE

GUIDE

CH.SEL

2 31

ATT

5 64

OSD

8097

THX

AUX1

LIGHT

RC8500SR

Learning Remote Controller

MUTE

EXIT

SURR

SPK-AB

SLEEP

MEMO

DSS

VCRDVD

CD-R

AMP

AUX2

1. To select tuner, Press the TUNER button twice

within two seconds on the remote.

Press the > button until PAGE 1 isdisplayed.

Press the BAND (D5) button to select either

FM or AM.

Press the GUIDE on the remote, display will

show “FREQ----”. lnput your desired station’s, frequency with the

ten numbered keypad on the remote.

The desired station will automatically be tuned.

(FM) TUNING MODE (AUTO STEREO OR MONO)

-OFF

.1 EQ

PEAK ANALOG

NIGHT

BAND

SURROUND

ATT

DIGITAL

LCR

LFE

AAC

PCM

SL S SR

MEMORY CLEAR

T-MODE

DISPLAY

SPEAKERS

MultEQ

A/B

EXIT

MIC

VOLUME

DOWN

DIGITAL

AUX 1 INPUT

RLVIDEO

S-VIDEO

AUDIO

When in the auto stereo mode, AUTO indicator will be illuminated on the display. The “ST” indicator is illuminated when a stereo broadcast is tuned in. At open frequencies, the noise is muted and the “TUNED” and “ST” indicators are not illuminated. If the signal is weak, it may be difﬁ cult to tune into the station in stereo. In such a case, Press the MODE button on the front panel. Or press the TUNER button and press the > button until PAGE 1 is displayed. Press the T-MODE (D4) button.

“AUTO” indicator is not illuminated, if FM stereo broadcasts are received in monaural and the “ST”

indicator is not illuminated. To return to auto stereo mode, Press the MODE button or Press T-MODE button on the remote again. AUTO indicator is illuminated the display.

USE

TUNERCDCD-R

TUNER

AUX1

TAPE

Learning Remote Controller

PAGE

DSS

VCRDVD

AMP

AUX2

LIGHT

RC8500SR

PRESET MEMORY

With this unit you can preset up to 60 FM/AM stations in any order. For each station, you can memorize the frequency and reception mode if desired.

AUTO PRESET MEMORY

This function automatically scans the FM and AM band and enters all stations with proper signal strength into the memory.

2. 4.

AV SURROUND RECEIVER SR8001

INPUT SELECTOR

STANDBY

POWER ON/OFF

PURE DIRECT

DSD

SURROUND

MODE AUTO

PURE DIRECT THX

PHONES

1. 3.

SURROUND

V-OFFDISP MULTI AUTO TUNED ST SPKR A B

PEAK ANALOG

ATT

DIGITAL

SURR DIRECT

NIGHT

SLEEP

DISC 6.1 MTX 6.1 EQ

AUTO

MULTI

SPEAKER

MULTI

7.1CH INPUT

LCR

LFE

AAC

PCM

SL S SR

MEMORY CLEAR

BAND

T-MODE

DISPLAY

SPEAKERS

MultEQ

ENTER

EXIT

MIC

1. To select FM , press the BAND button on the front panel.

While pressing the MEMORY button, press the

1 cursor button.

“AUTO PRESET” will appear on the display,

and scanning starts from the lowest frequency.

3. Each time the tuner ﬁ nds a station, scanning will pause and the station will be played for ﬁ ve seconds.

During this time, the following operations are

possible. The band can be changed by the BAND button.

4. If no button is pressed during this period, the current station is memorized in location Preset

02.

If you wish to skip the current station, press the

3 cursor button during this period, this station is skipped and auto presetting continues.

Operation stops automatically when all 50

preset memory positions are ﬁ lled or when auto scanning attains the highest end of all bands. If you desire to stop the auto preset memory at anytime, press the CLEAR button.

VOLUME

DOWN

A/B

DIGITAL

AUX 1 INPUT

RLVIDEO

S-VIDEO

AUDIO

MANUAL PRESET MEMORY

IRECT

SURR DIRECT

SLEEP

AUTO

SURROUND

MODE AUTO

MULTI

7.1CH INPUT

URE DIRECT THX

(Using the SR7001)

1. Tune into the radio station you desire (Refer to

the “MANUAL TUNING” or “AUTO TUNING” section).

Press the MEMORY button on the front panel.

“– –“ (preset number) starts blinking on the display.

Select the preset number by pressing the 1

or 2 (approx. 5 seconds)

Press the MEMORY button again to enter. The

display stops blinking.

The station is now stored in the speciﬁ ed preset

memory location.

(Using the remote control unit)

1. Tune into the radio station you desire (Refer to

the “MANUAL TUNING” or “AUTO TUNING” section).

Press the MEMO button on the remote. “– –“

(preset number) starts blinking on the display.

Enter the desired preset number by pressing

the numeric buttons.

Note:

• When entering a single digit number (2 for example), either input “02” or just input “2” and wait for a few seconds.

MULTI

SPEAKER

V-OFFDISP MULTI AUTO TUNED ST SPKR A B

DISC 6.1 MTX 6.1 EQ

ENTER

2. 4.

LIP.SYNC

GUIDE

TEST

CLEAR

CH.SEL

2 31

7.1CH

ATT

5 64

DISP

OSD

8097

THX

SURROUND

PEAK ANALOG

ATT

DIGITAL

NIGHT

LCR

LFE

AAC

PCM

BAND

T-MODE

DISPLAY

EXIT

cursor

SL S SR

MEMORY CLEAR

SPEAKERS

A/B

MultEQ

MIC

buttons, while this is still blinking

MUTE

EXIT

SURR

SPK-AB

SLEEP

MEMO

RECALLING A PRESET STATION

DSS

VCRDVD

TUNER

CD-R

AUX1

LIGHT

RC8001SR

Learning Remote Controller

AMP

AUX2

TUNER

TAPE

(Using the SR7001)

Select the desired preset station by pressing

the 1 or 2

cursor

buttons on the front panel.

(Using the remote control unit)

Press the TUNER button twice within two

seconds on the remote.

Press the > button until PAGE4 is displayed

Press the P-SET+ (D4) or P-SET– (D5) button

to tune in the deseired preset station.

Or enter the preset station number with the

numeric buttons.

VOL

LIP.SYNC

MUTE

PRESET SCAN

PAGE

AUX1

LIGHT

RC8001SR

Learning Remote Controller

CD-R

AMP

AUX2

USE

TUNER

TAPE

CLEAR

TEST

DISP

OSD

THX

(Using the remote control unit)

Press the TUNER button twice within two

seconds on the remote.

Press the > button until PAGE2 is displayed

and press the P-SCAN (D4) on the remote.

“PRESET SCAN” appears on the front display

and then the preset station with the lowest preset number is recalled ﬁ rst.

Preset stations are recalled in sequence (No.1

→ No.2 → etc.) for 5 seconds each.

No stored preset number will be skipped.

You can fast forward the preset stations, press

the > button until PAGE4 is displayed and press the P-SET+ (D4) continuously.

When the desired preset station is received,

cancel the preset scan operation by pressing the CLEAR button or P-SCAN (D4) on the remote.

VOL

LIP.SYNC

MUTE

GUIDE

EXIT

CH.SEL

SURR

5 64

SLEEP

8097

MEMO

ENGLISH

SOURCE

VOL

8097

TEST

CH.SEL

SURR

CLEARING STORED PRESET STATIONS

You can remove preset stations from the memory using the following procedure.

3.2.

2 31

7.1CH

CLEAR

ATT

5 64

DISP

OSD

THX

VCRDVD

ST SPKR A B

DISC 6.1 MTX 6.1 EQ

LTI

KER

ENTER

SURROUND

V-OFF

PEAK ANALOG

ATT

DIGITAL

NIGHT

LCR

LFE

AAC

PCM

SL S SR

MEMORY CLEAR

BAND

T-MODE

DISPLAY

SPEAKERS

MultEQ

A/B

EXIT

MIC

VOLU

DOWN

AUX 1 IN

DIGITAL

S-VIDEO

1. Recall the preset number to be cleared with the method described in “Recalling” a preset station.

Press the MEMORY button on the front panel

or press the MEMO button on the remote. The stored preset number blinks in the display

for 5 seconds. While blinking, press the CLEAR button on the front panel or the remote.

4. “xx CLEAR” appears on the display to indicate that the specified preset number has been cleared.

Note:

•

To clear all stored preset stations, press and hold the CLEAR and the ENTER buttons for two seconds.

SORTING PRESET STATIONS

AV SURROUND RECEIVER SR8001

INPUT SELECTOR

SPK-AB

SLEEP

MEMO

STANDBY

POWER ON/OFF

PURE DIRECT

SURR DIRECT

AUTO

SLEEP

DSD

SURROUND

MULTI

MODE AUTO

SPEAKER

MULTI

7.1CH INPUT

PURE DIRECT THX

PHONES

V-OFFDISP MULTI AUTO TUNED ST SPKR A B

DISC 6.1 MTX 6.1 EQ

ENTER

PEAK ANALOG

NIGHT

BAND

SURROUND

ATT

DIGITAL

LCR

LFE

AAC

PCM

SL S SR

MEMORY CLEAR

T-MODE

DISPLAY

SPEAKERS

MultEQ

A/B

EXIT

MIC

VOLUME

DOWN

AUX 1 INPUT

DIGITAL

S-VIDEO

DSS

If you have stations memorized, and there is a gap in the sequential order: I.e. the stations are stored as follows

1) 87.1 MHz

2) 93.1 MHz

3) 94.7 MHz

10) 105.9 MHz (notice there is no stations programmed for pre sets for 4-9), you can have pre set 10 become pre set 5: To sort the numbers, press and hold the MEMORY and the 4 cursor buttons. “PRESET SORT” will appear on the display and sorting will be done.

NAME INPUT OF THE PRESET STATION.

This function allows the name of each preset channel to be entered using alphanumeric characters. Before name inputting, you need to store preset

stations with the preset memory operation.

SURR DIRECT

SLEEP

DISC 6.1 MT X 6.1 EQ

AUTO

MULTI

SPEAKER

MULTI

7.1CH INPUT

ENTER

5. 2. 5. 6.

SURROUND

V-OFFDISP MULTI AUTO TUNED ST SPKR A B

PEAK ANALOG

ATT

DIGITAL

NIGHT

LCR

LFE

AAC

PCM

SL S SR

BAND

MEMORY CLEAR

T-MODE

DISPLAY

SPEAKERS

MultEQ

A/B

EXIT

MIC

RLVIDEO

AUDIO

INPUT SELECTOR

STANDBY

POWER ON/OFF

AV SURROUND RECEIVER SR8001

PHONES

PURE DIRECT

DSD

SURROUND

MODE AUTO

PURE DIRECT THX

USE

MEMO

PAGE

CLEAR

LIP.SYNC

THX

1. Recall the preset number to be inputted name with the method described in “Recalling” a preset station.

Press the MEMORY button on the front panel

or press the MEMO button on the remote for more than 3 seconds.

The left most column of the station name

indicator ﬂ ashes, indicating the character entry ready status.

When you press the 3 or 4 cursor buttons on

the front panel or the SCAN+ or SCAN– buttons

5. After selecting the ﬁ rst character to be entered,

press the MEMORY or ENTER button, or press the MEMO button on the remote.

The entry in this column is ﬁ xed and the next

column starts to ﬂ ash. Fill the next column the same way.

To move back and forth between the characters,

VOLUME

DOWN

AUX 1 INPUT

DIGITAL

RLVIDEO

S-VIDEO

AUDIO

press the 1 / 2 cursor buttons or press CH+ or CH– button on the remote.

Note:

• Unused columns should be filled by entering blanks.

To save the name, press the MEMORY or

ENTER button on the front panel, or press the MEMO button on the remote for more than 2

seconds.

Instead of using the 3 and 4 cursor buttons or

the SCAN+ and SCAN– buttons of the remote controller unit to select characters, characters can be input from the numeric keys of the remote control unit. See the below table for a correspondence between characters and numeric keys.

Ten keypad Press, press again, press again, etc.

1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 0

A → B → C → 1 → A D → E → F → 2 → D G → H → I → 3 → G J → K → L → 4 → J M → N → O → 5 → M P → Q → R → 6 → P S → T → U → 7 → S V → W → X → 8 → V Y → Z → space → 9 → Y – → + → / → 0

on the remote control unit (page 4), alphabetic and numeric characters will be displayed in the following order:

A → B → C ... Z → 1 → 2 → 3 ..... 0 → – → +

→ / → (Blank) → A UP → → DOWN

RDS OPERATION

Now in use in many countries, RDS (Radio Data System) is a description of the station’s programming hidden space in the FM signal. Your new receiver is equipped with RDS to assist in the selection of FM stations using station and network names, rather than broadcast frequencies. Additional RDS functions include the ability to search for programme types.

RADIO TEXT

Some RDS stations broadcast RADIO TEXT, which is additional information on the station and programme being broadcast. RADIO TEXT information appears as ‘running’ text in the display. RADIO TEXT is transmitted character by the radio station. As a result of that it may take some time until the entire text has been completely received.

RDS DISPLAY

When a receiver is tuned to an FM station that is transmitting RDS data, the Front Panel Information Display will automatically show the station name or RDS TEXT in place of the typical display of the station’s broadcast frequency. To change the display, press the TUNER button and press the the > button until PAGE3 is displayed. Press the DISP (D1) button.

DSS

VCRDVD

TUNER

CD-R

AUX1

LIGHT

RC8500SR

Learning Remote Controller

AMP

AUX2

TUNER

TAPE

USE

PAGE

VOL

PROGRAMME TYPE (PTY) DISPLAY

The RDS system categorizes programmes according to their genre into different programme type (PTY) groups. To display the programme type information of the current station, press the TUNER button and press the the > button until PAGE3 is displayed. Press the PTY (D2) button.

TUNER

AUX1

TAPE

LIGHT

RC8500SR

Learning Remote Controller

PS (

Program Service Name

DSS

VCRDVD

CD-R

AMP

AUX2

RT (

) Frequency

USE

RADIO TEXT

PAGE

VOL

)

PTY AUTO SEARCH

Your receiver is equipped to automatically search for stations transmitting any of 29 different programme types. To search for a PTY, follow these procedures:

CLEAR

USE

TEST

7.1CH

DISP

SURROUND

V-OFFDISP MULTI AUTO TUNED ST SPKR A B

PEAK ANALOG

ATT

DIGITAL

SURR DIRECT

AUTO

NIGHT

SLEEP

DISC 6.1 MTX 6.1 EQ

LCR

LFE

AAC

PCM

SL S SR

UND

EAUTO

IRECT THX

MULTI

SPEAKER

BAND

MULTI

T-MODE

DISPLAY

7.1CH INPUT

ENTER

EXIT

MEMORY CLEAR

MultEQ

MIC

DOWN

SPEAKERS

A/B

DIGITAL

S-

1. Press the PTY button in the TUNER MODE on the remote controller. The current station’s PTY will be displayed, or the currently selected PTY group will be displayed in blinking if no station or RDS data is present.

To change to a new PTY type, press the

TUNING 3 or 4 button on the front panel or numeric buttons on the remote until the desired

PTY is shown in the display.

3. Once the desired PTY group or type has been selected, press the PTY button while the display blink (approx. 5 seconds). The PTY Auto search will start, and the tuner will pause at each station broadcasting RDS PTY information corresponding to the selected choice.

To advance to the next RDS station with the

desired PTY, press the PTY button again within 5 seconds.

PAGE

CH.SEL

2 31

ATT

5 64

OSD

8097

THX

EXIT

SURR

SPK-AB

SLEEP

MEMO

NUMBER DISPLAY PROGRAMME TYPE

1 POP Pop Music 2 ROCK Rock Music 3 MOR M. O. R. Music 4 LIGHT Light classical 5 CLASSIC Serious classical 6 NEWS News 7 AFFAIR Current Affairs 8 INFO Information

9 SPORT Sport 10 EDUCATE Education 11 DRAMA Drama 12 CULTURE Culture 13 SCIENCE Science 14 OTHERS Varied 15 OTHER Other Music 16 WEATHER Weather 17 FINANCE Finance 18 CHILDREN Children’s programmes 19 SOCIAL Social Affairs 20 RELIGION Religion 21 PHONE IN Phone In 22 TRAVEL Travel 23 HOBBIES Hobbies 24 JAZZ Jazz Music 25 COUNTRY Country Music 26 NATION National Music 27 OLDIES Oldies Music 28 FOLK Folk Music 29 DOCUMENT Documentary

ENGLISH

MULTI ROOM SYSTEM

The Multiroom System mode allows the same source or different sources to be heard in two rooms other than where this receiver is installed.

To use the multiroom system, connect the audio from the MULTI OUT A and B AUDIO output terminals to the MULTI ROOM A and B amps.

Note:

• The SR7001 does not have a MULTI ROOM B setting.

Connect the VIDEO output (MULTI OUT) terminal to the monitor in Room A. (MULTI VIDEO OUT terminal is linked to the source selector in Multi Room A.)

If a surround channel back speaker or speaker C (see page 19) are not used in the room where this receiver is installed, the multi speaker system can be used with the amp for the surround back channel.

Also, the COMPONENT VIDEO MONITOR OUT 2 terminal can be used for the monitor output of Room A. (This feature cannot be used with the SR7001.)

This receiver supports multiroom system functions such as source selectors, OSD menu systems, sleep timers and remote control.

MULTI ROOM PLAYBACK USING THE MULTI ROOM OUT TERMINALS

2. 1.

AV SURROUND RECEIVER SR8001

INPUT SELECTOR

STANDBY

POWER ON/OFF

PURE DIRECT

SURR DIRECT

SLEEP

AUTO

DSD

SURROUND

MULTI

MODE AUTO

SPEAKER

MULTI

7.1CH INPUT

PURE DIRECT THX

PHONES

V-OFFDISP MULTI AUTO TUNED ST SPKR A B

DISC 6.1 MTX 6.1 EQ

ENTER

PEAK ANALOG

NIGHT

BAND

SURROUND

ATT

DIGITAL

LCR

LFE

AAC

PCM

SL S SR

MEMORY CLEAR

T-MODE

DISPLAY

SPEAKERS

MultEQ

A/B

EXIT

MIC

1. Pressing the MULTI button on the receiver one time accesses the MULTI ROOM A settings. Pressing it two times accesses the MULTI ROOM B settings. Then, pressing it a third time turns the multiroom feature off. (The SR7001 does not have a MULTI ROOM B setting.)

When the MULTI ROOM setting mode is

engaged, one of the following screens appears on the display for 10 seconds.

– SR8001 –

* Display when MULTI ROOM A is selected

MA DVD -18dB

* Display when MULTI ROOM B is selected

MB DVD -18dB

VOLUME

DOWN

AUX 1 INPUT

DIGITAL

S-VIDEO

MULTI ROOM PLAYBACK USING THE MULTI SPEAKER TERMINALS

The SR7001 allows you to connect another set of speakers and place them in a different room or separated area for Iistening to music.

2. 1.

AV SURROUND RECEIVER SR8001

INPUT SELECTOR

LVIDEO

STANDBY

POWER ON/OFF

1. Pressing the MULTI SPEAKER button on the receiver one time accesses the MULTI SPEAKER A settings. Pressing it two times accesses the MULTI SPEAKER B settings. Then, pressing it a third time turns the MULTI SPEAKER feature off.

(The SR7001 does not have a MULTI SPEAKER

B setting.)

When the MULTI SPEAKER setting mode is

engaged, one of the following screens appears on the display for 10 seconds.

– SR8001 –

* Display when MULTI SPEAKER A is selected

MSA DVD -18dB

PURE DIRECT

SURR DIRECT

SLEEP

AUTO

DSD

SURROUND

MULTI

MODE AUTO

SPEAKER

MULTI

7.1CH INPUT

PURE DIRECT THX

PHONES

V-OFFDISP MULTI AUTO TUNED ST SPKR A B

DISC 6.1 MTX 6.1 EQ

ENTER

PEAK ANALOG

NIGHT

BAND

SURROUND

ATT

DIGITAL

LCR

LFE

AAC

PCM

SL S SR

MEMORY CLEAR

T-MODE

DISPLAY

SPEAKERS

MultEQ

A/B

EXIT

MIC

– SR7001 –

The unit enters multi room mode and the display indicates “SELECT SOURCE” and flashes the “MULTI” indicator for approx. 10 seconds.

Select an input source with the INPUT

SELECTOR knob.

Turn the VOLUME knob to set the volume of

VOLUME

DOWN

the room used in the multiroom system as you like.

Note:

• The sleep timer, monaural output and other features

AUX 1 INPUT

DIGITAL

LVIDEO

S-VIDEO

can also be set using the MAIN MENU. (See page

36.)

Notes for Multi Room Speaker

• The Multiroom Speaker mode can be set for only one of the rooms, A or B.

• The MULTI ROOM SPEAKER output terminals can be used when Surround Back Speaker = “NONE” in the SPEAKER SETUP menu. (See SPEAKER SETUP, page 26)

• “The Surr. Back Speakers are in use” is displayed when the MULTI SPEAKER button is pressed when the Surround Back Speaker is not set to “NONE” in the SPEAKER SETUP menu. (See SPEAKER SETUP, page 26)

• The Multispeaker mode cannot be used at the same time as the speaker C. When connecting for multiroom use, set the SPEAKER C selector switch on the rear panel to OFF.

– SR7001 –

The unit enters multi room mode and the display indicates “SELECT SOURCE” and flashes the “MULTI” indicator for approx. 10 seconds.

Select an input source with the INPUT

SELECTOR knob.

Turn the VOLUME knob to set the volume of

the room used in the multi room system as you like.

Note:

• The sleep timer, monaural output and other features can also be set using the MAIN MENU.

(See page 36)

* Display when MULTI SPEAKER B is selected

MSB DVD -18dB

OPERATION OF THE MULTI ROOM OUTPUTS WITH THE REMOTE CONTROL FROM MULTI A

Room A output can be operated from a room where the receiver is not installed. This requires a separately sold IR receiver. (For connections, see page 11.)

PAGE

123

AUX1

LIGHT

RC8500SR

Learning Remote Controller

DSS

VCRDVD

CD-R

AMP

AUX2

AMP

USE

TUNER

TAPE

USE

TEST

7.1CH

1. Press MULTI on the multi room remote control from the MULTI ROOM.

(Press the AMP button and press the > button

until PAGE 4 is displayed. Press the MULTI (D1) button.)

This operations will put the SR7001 into multi

room mode and “MULTI” will be illuminated on the display.

MULTl ROOM Video out put will show OSD

information for the MULTI ROOM setup.

MULTI ROOM A VIDEO :DSS AUDIO :FM 102.00MHz SLEEP :90 min MONO/ST:STEREO

MULTI:OFF MAPKR:OFF VOL :VARI VOL :VARI LEVEL:-90dB LEVEL:-90dB

--- MAIN ROOM STATUS --VIDEO:DVD AUDIO:DVD

RETURN BACK EXIT

PAGE

VOL

LIP.SYNC

GUIDE

CH.SEL

2 31

ATT

MUTE

EXIT

SURR

SPK-AB

2. Press the VOL+ or VOL− button on the multi room remote control to set the desired volume.

In multi room mode, the multi room remote

control can be used in the multiroom to operate the following functions.

General:

Controlling volume level, sleep timer, and muting. SeIecting input audio and video source.

Tuner:

Selecting band, controlling preset channel up and down, tuning up and down direct frequency call.

Notes for the Multi Room System

• The MULTI ROOM OUT (MULTl OUT/MULTI SPEAKER) has analog outputs.

This does not support digital input signals.

• If the Tuner (FM or AM) is active in the main room, you can not control any function of the tuner.In this case, You must listen to the same station as the main room.

• When the component with RC-5 bus is connected to the MULTI RC IN jack(see page 19), Multiroom A can be operated using the RC codes for the main room. The remote control units of other Marantz products can also be used to control multiroom A.

(Room B output cannot be operated from another

room.)

ENGLISH

REMOTE CONTROLLER OPERATION

CONTROLLING MARANTZ COMPONENTS

1. Press the desired function button.

• The selected function name and USE are displayed in the LCD.

Press the desired operation buttons to play the selected component.

• For details, refer to the component’s user guide.

• It may not be possible to operate some models.

CONTROLLING A MARANTZ DVD PLAYER (DVD MODE) CONTROLLING A MARANTZ CD PLAYER (CD MODE) CONTROLLING A MARANTZ VCR (VCR MODE)

POWER

OFF

ON/OFF

USE

PAGE

DVD

AUX1

Learning Remote Controller

SOURCE

ON/OFF

VOL

LIP.SYNC

MUTE

GUIDE

EXIT

CH.SEL

SURR

CH.SEL

SURR

2 31

ATT

SPK-AB

ATT

SPK-AB

5 64

OSD

SLEEP

OSD

SLEEP

8097

THX

MEMO

DSS

VCRDVD

AMP

AUX2

LIGHT

RC8001SR

OFF

TEST

7.1CH

DISP

CLEAR

TUNERCDCD-R

TAPE

SOURCE ON/OFF

Turns the DVD player on and off POWER ON Turns the DVD player on POWER OFF Turns the DVD player off D1 - D5 / >(Page) (Refer to page vi) Cursor/OK Move the cursor, enters the setting MENU Calls up the menu of DVD disc 0-9 Input the numeric MEMO Call up the programming menu CLEAR Clears the inputting

4 / ¢ Skip forward or previous chapter/

Play

track

9 ;

Stop

Pause

POWER

OFF

ON/OFF

USE

AUX1

Learning Remote Controller

ON/OFF

SOURCE

PAGE

VOL

LIP.SYNC

MUTE

GUIDE

EXIT

CH.SEL

SURR

CH.SEL

SURR

2 31

ATT

SPK-AB

ATT

SPK-AB

5 64

OSD

SLEEP

OSD

SLEEP

8097

THX

MEMO

DSS

VCRDVD

AMP

AUX2

LIGHT

RC8001SR

OFF

TEST

7.1CH

DISP

CLEAR

TUNERCDCD-R

TAPE

SOURCE ON/OFF

Turns the CD player on and off POWER ON Turns the CD player on POWER OFF Turns the CD player off D1 - D5 / >(Page) (Refer to page vi) MENU Switches the display information 0-9 Input the numeric MEMO Programs CLEAR Clears the inputting

4 / ¢ Skip forward or previous track

9 ;

Play

Stop

Pause

POWER

OFF

ON/OFF

SOURCE

PAGE

LIP.SYNC

GUIDE

CH.SEL

2 31

ATT

5 64

OSD

8097

THX

AUX1

LIGHT

RC8001SR

Learning Remote Controller

VOL

MUTE

EXIT

SURR

SPK-AB

SLEEP

MEMO

DSS

VCRDVD

VCR

AMP

AUX2

USE

TEST

7.1CH

DISP

CLEAR

TUNERCDCD-R

TAPE

SOURCE ON/OFF

Turns the VCR on and off D1 - D5 / >(Page) (Refer to page vi) MENU Call up the menu EXIT Exits the programming menu 0-9 Input the numeric

4 / ¢ Skip forward or previous track

9 ; 0

Play

Stop

Pause

Record

CONTROLLING A MARANTZ CD RECORDER (CDR MODE) CONTROLLING A MARANTZ MD DECK (MD MODE) CONTROLLING A MARANTZ TAPE DECK (TAPE MODE)

ENGLISH

POWER

OFF

ON/OFF

USE

AUX1

Learning Remote Controller

ON/OFF

SOURCE

PAGE

VOL

LIP.SYNC

MUTE

GUIDE

EXIT

CH.SEL

SURR

CH.SEL

SURR

2 31

ATT

SPK-AB

ATT

SPK-AB

5 64

OSD

SLEEP

OSD

SLEEP

8097

THX

MEMO

DSS

VCRDVD

CD-R

AMP

AUX2

LIGHT

RC8001SR

OFF

TEST

7.1CH

DISP

CLEAR

TUNERCDCD-R

TAPE

SOURCE ON/OFF

Turns the CD recorder on and off POWER ON Turns the CD recorder on POWER OFF Turns the CD recorder off D1 - D5 / >(Page) (Refer to page vi) MENU Switches the display information 0-9 Input the numeric MEMO Programs CLEAR Clears the inputting

4 / ¢ Skip forward or previous track

9 ; 0

Play

Stop

Pause

Record

POWER

OFF

ON/OFF

USE

AUX1

Learning Remote Controller

ON/OFF

SOURCE

PAGE

VOL

LIP.SYNC

MUTE

GUIDE

EXIT

CH.SEL

SURR

2 31

ATT

SPK-AB

5 64

OSD

SLEEP

8097

THX

MEMO

DSS

VCRDVD

AMP

AUX2

LIGHT

RC8001SR

OFF

TEST

7.1CH

DISP

CLEAR

TUNERCDCD-R

TAPE

SOURCE ON/OFF

Turns the MD deck on and off POWER ON Turns the MD deck on POWER OFF Turns the MD deck off D1 - D5 / >(Page) (Refer to page vi) MENU Switches the display information 0-9 Input the numeric MEMO Programs CLEAR Clears the inputting

4 / ¢ Skip forward or previous track

9 ; 0

Play

Stop

Pause

Record

POWER

OFF

ON/OFF

USE

AUX1

Learning Remote Controller

ON/OFF

SOURCE

PAGE

VOL

LIP.SYNC

MUTE

GUIDE

EXIT

CH.SEL

SURR

CH.SEL

SURR

2 31

ATT

SPK-AB

ATT

SPK-AB

5 64

OSD

SLEEP

OSD

SLEEP

8097

THX

MEMO

DSS

VCRDVD

AMP

AUX2

LIGHT

RC8001SR

OFF

TEST

7.1CH

DISP

CLEAR

TUNERCDCD-R

TAPE

SOURCE ON/OFF

Turns the TAPE deck on and off POWER ON Turns the TAPE deck on POWER OFF Turns the TAPE deck off D1 - D5 / >(Page) (Refer to page vi) 0-9 Input the numeric MEMO Programs CLEAR Clears the inputting

4 / ¢ Skip forward or previous track

9 ; 0

Play

Stop

Pause

Record

ENGLISH

BASIC OPERATION

USE MODE

(Normal operation status)

This remote control is preset with a total of 12 types of remote codes, including Marantz TV (television), DVD, VCR (VCR deck), DSS (satellite broadcasting tuner), TUNER, CD/CD-R, MD, TAPE (tape deck), AUX1, AUX2, and AMP (ampliﬁ er). Learning is not necessary for Marantz products. You can use these products without setting any codes.

Press the SOURCE button.

For this example, press DVD. DVD is shown on the LCD, and the remote control

is set for DVD.

Pressing the

remote control to the settings for the source that was pressed.

To change the ampliﬁ er or other source, press the

SOURCE

is sent, and then the amplifier source changes to DVD.

2. Press the buttons to operate the DVD.

The indicator is shown on the LCD while the

remote control codes are being transmitted. It is not displayed when buttons without stored code are pressed.

SOURCE

button twice (double-click). The code

button once changes the

3. The direct buttons can be used to perform up to 20 operations for each of the 12 sources, including DVD, TV, AMP, and other AV equipment.

The buttons consist of the D1 to D5 buttons, and

the equipment is operated by pressing the buttons corresponding to the indicators on the LCD.

Four pages are available, and press the > button

to select a page. The current page position is displayed on the LCD.

PRESET MODE

(When operating non-Marantz AV equipment products)

This remote control is preset with remote control codes from AV equipment by other manufacturers. The preset codes are TV, VCR, LD, CABLE, DSS, DVD, TAPE, TUNER, CD/CD-R, MD and AMP. Settings can be made in one of two ways. When the preset codes are set, the following codes are contained in the

SOURCE button of the remote

control.

See the attached manufacturer number list for the preset manufacturers, devices, preset numbers, and other settings.

Remote control source name

TV TV Television DVD DVD DVD player VCR VCR Video deck DSS SATELLITE Satellite broadcasting

TUNER CD CD/CD-R PLAYER CD player CD-R CD/CD-R PLAYER CD recorder MD CD/CD-R PLAYER MD deck TAPE TAPE Cassette deck AUX1 CABLE Cable television AUX2 LASER DISC Laser disc player AMP AMPLIFIER Ampliﬁ er or receiver

Corresponding preset code

RECEIVER/TUNER

Device name

tuner equipment AM FM TUNER

• When using Marantz products, TV and DVD can be set to TV1 (TV/VDP: Projector) and TV2 (PDP: Plasma display), and DVD1 (ﬁ rst DVD player) and DVD2 (second DVD player), respectively, to match the customer’s operating environment. These settings are made in PRESET mode.

In the factory default state, the remote control is

set to TV1 and DVD1. To make the presets, enter the numbers below while referring to the section “Entering and Setting the Manufacturer Number Directly”.

TV1: 0001, TV2: 0002 DVD1: 0001, DVD2: 0002

Entering and Setting the Manufacturer Number Directly

Refer to the manufacturer number list. This example shows how to set a SAMSUNG DVD player.

2 3 4

LEARN

USE

PAGE

5 6

LEARN

1. View the supplied manufacturer number list, and ﬁ nd the number of the manufacturer for the device that you are using.

Hold down the M button for three seconds or

more.

The menu is displayed.

3. Press the D1 (PRESET) direct button. The Preset setting (P-SET) is displayed.

Press the DVD source button.

Press the numeric buttons to enter the four-

digit manufacturer number.

Example: To enter “0600” from the manufacturer

To correct the entered number, use the 1 or 2

cursor button to enter the correct number.

number list.

• If no button is pressed for over one minute

during the setting process, any settings that were made are cancelled.

Press the OK cursor button.

Confirm the OK is displayed and then the

display returns to the Preset Setting (P-SET).

When the manufacturer number is entered correctly,

OK is displayed momentarily on the screen.

• If you enter a number not in the manufacturer

number list, WRONG CODE is displayed, and then you return to the preset setting again

Check the manufacturer number list, and

either set a different number or use the sequence function to set.

To set the manufacturer number for another

source device, repeat the procedure in steps 4 to 6.

After the settings are completed, press the M

button.

Press the buttons on the remote control to

10.

check that the DVD can be operated correctly.

Setting Equipment Not Appearing in Manufacturer Number List

Use the sequence function to set equipment not appearing in the manufacturer number list. You may still be unable to set some equipment even when using the sequence function. In this case, the remote control can be programmed with codes individually. In the sequence function, the power ON/OFF codes are transmitted by pressing the remote control buttons in order. If the power for the equipment is left on, hold down the button until the equipment is turned off, and then release. This completes the setting.

This example shows how to set a DVD player.

4 5 7

LEARN

PAGE

1. Turn on the power of the DVD player.

Hold down the M button for three seconds or

more.

The menu is displayed.

3. Press the D1 (PRESET) direct button.

The Preset setting (P-SET) is displayed.

4. Press the DVD source button.

Hold down the CH+ or CH– button for one

second or more.

Press the CH+ button repeatedly in the interval

for one second.

The signal is transmitted, and the display cycles

through the code number.

Press the

screen.

CH–

button to go back to a number

7. Release the button once the DVD player turns off.

Press the OK cursor button.

Confirm the OK is displayed and then the

display returns to the Preset Setting (P-SET).

To set the manufacturer number for another

10.

source device, repeat the procedure in steps 4 to 8.

After the settings are completed, press the M

11.

button.

Press the buttons on the remote control to

12.

check that the DVD can be operated correctly.

Check the following points if the equipment which was set does not operate properly.

• If there is more than one number in the manufacturer

number list, try setting a different number.

• There may be some buttons which cannot be

used. Program the codes to the required buttons.

LEARN MODE Programming the 2 (PLAY) and Other Control But-

tons and Numeric Buttons

This remote control is capable of learning and storing codes used by other remote controls that you already own. For codes which are not learned, the remote control will transmit either the Marantz preset codes from the initial settings, or remote codes from another manufacturer’s AV equipment which is set by the customer. The receiver sensor for the remote control signals is located at the top of the remote control.

This example shows how to learn the codes from the remote control of a DVD player.

1 2 4

LEARN

USE

PAGE

6 (When OK) (failed) (codes are full)

LEARN

PAGE

LEARN

PAGE

1. Hold down the M button for three seconds or more.

The menu is displayed.

2. Press the D2 (LEARN) direct button.

The LEARN setting (LEARN) is displayed. The

indicator then blinks.

3. Press the DVD source button.

Press the 2 (PLAY) button.

The

LEARN

indicate that learning is ready.

indicator blinks, and then displays to

5. Place the receiver sensor of the remote control (top) so that it is facing the transmitter of the DVD remote control (top) at a distance of about 5 cm (2 inches).

LEARN

6. Press and hold down the 2 (PLAY) button of the transmitting DVD remote control, and check that OK is displayed on the LCD.

The remote control has ﬁ nished learning when OK

is displayed on the LCD.

If ERROR is displayed on the LCD, some error has

prevented the command from being learned. If this happens, repeat the procedure for steps 4 and 5.

In some rare cases, ERROR may be displayed

repeatedly during the learning operation. In this case, the transmitting remote control may have special signal codes. These codes cannot be learned by this remote control.

7. Follow the same procedure to make the remote control learn the other buttons.

Repeat the procedure in steps 3 to 6 to have

the remote control learn the signal codes from a TV, CD player, or other AV equipment.

• When no buttons are pressed for

approximately one minute during the learning operation, the remote control automatically returns to USE mode.

• When programming the source buttons,

switch to the source in step 3, and then press the source button again.

9. When you have finished programming the codes for each button, press the M button.

The

USE

indicator is displayed on the LCD, and the

newly stored codes can be used.

• If FULL is displayed on the LCD, the

memory cannot hold any more learned codes in LEARN mode.

If FULL is displayed no matter how many

times you try the learning operation, the remote control cannot accept any more new codes until some of the previously learned codes are deleted from the memory. Delete some of the learned buttons from the sources.

The M button and > button cannot be taught. Only each one code can be learned for the LIGHT buttons 1 and 2, regardless of the source.

Programming the Direct Buttons and Rewriting Names

This example shows how to program codes from other manufacturer products to the DVD MENU button (D1) and change the display to OSD.

6 7 8

LEARN

PAGE

1. Hold down the M button for three seconds or more.

The menu is displayed.

2. Press the D2 (LEARN) direct button.

The LEARN setting (LEARN) indicator is displayed.

The

3. Press the DVD source button.

The first page of the direct button screen is

displayed. There are four available pages. Pressing the > buttons cycles through the pages in this order 1 → 2 → 3 → 4 → 1.

4. Press the D1 (MENU) direct button.

The

indicate that learning is ready.

5. Place the receiver sensor of the remote control (top) so that it is facing the transmitter of the DVD remote control (top) at a distance of about 5 cm (2 inches).

Press and hold down the OSD button of the

transmitting DVD remote control, and check that OK is displayed on the LCD.

The remote control has ﬁ nished learning when OK

is displayed on the LCD.

If ERROR is displayed on the LCD, some error has

prevented the command from being learned. If this happens, repeat the procedure for steps 4 and 5.

• After learning is completed, the remote

control automatically switches to name rewriting mode. The left end “ on the MENU blinks to indicate that the blinking part can be rewritten.

• If no names will be rewritten, press the

OK cursor button. The display returns to learning standby mode by pressing the OK cursor button.

LEARN

PAGE

LEARN

indicator then blinks.

LEARN

indicator blinks, and then displays to

LEARN

PAGE

” indicator

7. To change the name, press the numeric buttonsto enter the text.

• Use the cursor buttons 1 2 to move to the

sections to be rewritten on the LCD.

• To change MENU to OSD, press the 5

numeric button.

Each time the button is pressed, the display

cycles through M → N → O → 5 → M.

After rewriting of the text is completed, press

the OK cursor button.

To delete text that is already entered, press the 0

button to insert a space.

• In this example, MENU is changed to “OSD

(space) (space)” in this step, and then OSD is displayed in the right side by pressing the OK button.

For details, refer to the section “Rewriting Names”.

9. In the same way, use the > button to select the page, and then press the direct button to program the codes.

After programming the codes for each of the

10.

buttons, press the M button.

The

USE

indicator displays on the LCD, and the

newly stored codes can be transmitted.

REWRITING NAMES

This remote control allows the rewriting of names for the sources and direct buttons. This operation is performed for each individual source. This example shows how to change the source name from DVD to AVD and AUDIO to SOUND.

3 4 5

NAME

PAGE

LEARN

USE

PAGE

7 8 9

NAME

PAGE

NAME

PAGE

1. Hold down the M button for three seconds or more.

The menu is displayed.

2. Press the D3 (NAME) direct button .

NAME

PAGE

NAME

PAGE

ENGLISH

3. Press the DVD source button .

The

NAME

indicator blinks.

The “ ” blinks to indicate that the letter can be

changed.

4. Press the 2 cursor button twice.

The D in DVD blinks to indicate that the letter can

be changed.

5. Press the 1 numeric button to select A.

Each time the numeric buttons are pressed, the

button cycles through the alphanumeric characters

shown below. 1: A → B → C → 1 → A 2: D → E → F → 2 → D 3: G → H → I → 3 → G 4: J → K → L → 4 → J 5: M → N → O → 5 → M 6: P → Q → R → 6 → P 7: S → T → U → 7 → S 8: V → W → X → 8 → V 9: Y

→

Z → / → 9 →

0: SPACE (

SPACE (

→

6. Press the 1 or 2 cursor button .

The letter is changed to “A”.

Y ) → + → — → , → ’ → < → > → ? → 0 )

• The 3 and 4 cursor buttons can be used to move the blinking indicator of the section to be rewritten.

Press the 3 or 4 cursor buttons to select

AUDIO on the direct button indicator. The A ﬂ ashes to indicate that the name can be changed.

Press the 7 numeric button to select S.

Each time the button is pressed, the button cycles

through S → T → U → 7 → S.

9. Press the 2 cursor button to move the ﬂ ashing section.

Press the 5 numeric button to select 0.

10.

Follow the same procedure to enter U, N, and

11.

When ﬁ nished entering the text, press the OK

12.

cursor button .

Press the M button .

13.

The

The input is overwritten, and so the currently

Up to six characters can be entered for the direct

USE

indicator displays on the LCD, and the

newly stored codes can be used.

displayed text is erased.

button indicator.

ERASING PROGRAMMED CODES (RETURNING TO INITIAL SETTINGS)

Codes can be erased in ﬁ ve ways: by buttons, direct buttons, direct button pages, sources, and by all memory contents.

Erasing Buttons and Erasing Direct Buttons

This example shows how to erase the code learned from the PLAY button of the DVD player and the AUTO code of the AMP direct button.

Erasing buttons

1 3 4

LEARN

USE

PAGE

1. Hold down the M button for three seconds or more.

The menu is displayed.

2. Press the D5 (ERASE) direct button .

Press the DVD source button .

The

USE

and

LEARN

indicators blink.

4. Press the button 2 (PLAY) that you want to erase while holding down the CLEAR button .

A message is displayed on the LCD.

5. Press the D4 (YES) direct button to erase.

The code programmed to the 2 (PLAY) button is

erased.

When the code is cleared, the code for this button

resets to the factory default code or becomes blank.

• To cancel the erasing operation, press the

D5 (NO) button to return to the previous display.

To erase codes programmed for the CLEAR

button, simply press the CLEAR button twice.

To erase codes programmed for the

SOURCE button, simply press the SOURCE button twice.

Erasing direct buttons

6 8 9

LEARN

USE

PAGE

LEARN

6. Press the AMP source button .

Press the > button to display the ﬁ rst page for

AMP.

Press the D1 (AUTO) direct button to be erased

while holding down the CLEAR button .

Press the D4 (YES) direct button to erase.

The code programmed to the

AUTO

button is

erased.

When the code is cleared, the code for this button

resets to the factory default code or becomes blank. The rewritten name returns to the original name.

• To cancel the erasing operation, press the

D5 (NO) button to return to the previous screen.

When the erasing operation is ﬁ nished, press

10.

the M button .

The

USE

remote control can now be operated.

indicator displays to indicate that the

Erasing Direct Button Pages

This example shows how to erase the entire direct button second page learned from the DVD player.

1 3 4

LEARN

USE

PAGE

LEARN

USE

PAGE

Hold down the M button for three seconds or

more.

The menu is displayed.

2. Press the D5 (ERASE) direct button .

Press the DVD source button .

The

USE

and

LEARN

indicators blink.

4. Press the > button to display the second page.

Press the > button while holding down the

CLEAR button .

LEARN

USE

PAGE

Press the D4 (YES) direct button to erase.

All codes and names programmed to page 2 are

erased. When the codes are cleared, the codes for this button reset to the factory default code or become blank. Any rewritten names return to the original name.

• To cancel the erasing operation, press the

D5 (NO) button to return to the previous screen.

When the erasing operation is ﬁ nished, press

the M button .

The

USE

indicator lights up to indicate that the

remote control can now be operated.

Erasing Sources

This procedure clears all codes and names programmed to the DVD, TV, or other sources. All codes and names in the four direct button pages are also erased. This example shows how to erase the names and codes learned from the DVD player.

1 3 4

LEARN

USE

PAGE

USE

PAGE

1. Hold down the M button for three seconds or more.

The menu is displayed.

2. Press the D5 (ERASE) direct button .

Press the DVD source button .

The

USE

and

LEARN

indicators blink.

4. Press the DVD source button while holding down the CLEAR button .

Press the D4 (YES) direct button to erase.

All codes and names programmed to the DVD

source are erased. When the codes are cleared, the codes for this button reset to the factory default code or become blank. Any rewritten names return to the original name.

• To cancel the erasing operation, press the

D5 (NO) button to return to the previous display.

6. When the erasing operation is ﬁ nished, press the M button .

The

USE

indicator displays to indicate that the

remote control can now be operated.

LEARN

USE

PAGE

USE

PAGE

USE

PAGE

Erasing All

This procedure clears (resets) all programmed codes and names. Once all the data is cleared, the memory is returned to the factory default status. The programmed macros are also erased.

1 3 4

LEARN

USE

PAGE

USE

PAGE

LEARN

USE

PAGE

1. Hold down the M button for three seconds or more.

The menu is displayed.

2. Press the D5 (ERASE) direct button .

The

USE

and

LEARN

indicators blink.

3. Press the CLEAR button while holding down the POWER ON and OFF buttons at the same time.

Press the D4 (YES) direct button to erase.

All programmed codes and names are erased and

reset to the factory default settings.

• To cancel the erasing operation, press the

D5 (NO) button to return to the previous screen.

• To erase all operation takes a few seconds

after the D4 (YES) button is pressed.

PROGRAMMING MACROS

This remote control can program a series of button operations in sequence. Macros are a function that makes it possible to use a single button operation to perform a complex series of button operations any number of times. A single button can be programmed to perform up to 20 steps in sequence. A total of 20 buttons can be programmed with macros.

• For example, the following sequence of operations

can be programmed to a macro.

Switch ampliﬁ er to DVD source → Set ampliﬁ er

mode to AUTO → Play DVD player → Switch TV to video input

The factory default for the transmission interval (time) between macro operations is one second, but these signal transmission intervals can be set between approximately 0.5 seconds and 5 seconds in the Setup mode. Each transmission interval can be adjusted independently when programming or revising a macro.

Note:

• If the signal transmission interval (interval time) is changed using the Setup mode (described later), this transmission interval is applied to all macro programs. To change individual signal transmission intervals, use the procedures in this section for programming macros and revising macros.

• No signals are transmitted while programming a macro.

• The M button, > button, cursor buttons, MEMO button, CLEAR button, and VOL buttons cannot be programmed.

• If no button is pressed for approximately one minute during programming, the remote control returns to the state before macro mode.

In this case, the macro program is not stored.

• When executing macro mode, performing the source switching operation two or more times only changes the remote control mode and does not transmit any signals. (Switching of the source selector of the ampliﬁ er is valid only once.)

PROGRAMMING MACROS

This example shows how to program a macro to the M-01 button. (The screens shown in the example are the default factory states. If the names of direct buttons were rewritten, these modified names would be displayed.) Switch ampliﬁ er to DVD source → Play DVD player → Set the interval to 2 seconds until the next signal is sent → Switch TV to video input → Set the ampliﬁ er mode to AUTO

1 2 3

LEARN

MACRO

USE

PAGE

1. Hold down the M button for three seconds or

more.

The menu is displayed.

2. Press the D4 (MACRO) direct button .

The macro menu is displayed. The

3. Press the D1 (M-01) direct button .

The menu has four pages, and so use the > button

MACRO

indicator displays and

to select the page when programming other buttons.

LEARN

MACRO

LEARN

PAGE

blinks.

4. Press the buttons in the sequence that you want the operations performed.

The actual program starts here. Each time a button is pressed, the name of the

button is displayed on the LCD.

4-1 4-2 4-3

LEARN

MACRO

PAGE

Press the DVD source button .

4-1.

Press the 2 (PLAY) button .

4-2.

Press the 3 or 4 cursor buttons .

4-3.

The interval time is displayed on the LCD.

Press the 3 or 4 cursor buttons and set to 2.0

4-4.

LEARN

MACRO

PAGE

LEARN

MACRO

PAGE

(seconds).

• Use the 3 cursor button to increase the time

and the 4 button to decrease the time. The interval time can be set from 0.5 seconds to 5 seconds.

• To stop the time adjustment, press the D5

(CANCEL) direct button.

Press the OK cursor button .

4-5.

Press the TV source button .

4-6.

Press the > button to display the ﬁ rst page.

4-7.

Press the D1 (INPUT) direct button .

4-8.

Press the AMP source button .

4-9.

Press the > button to display the ﬁ rst page.

4-10.

Press the D1 (AUTO) direct button .

4-11.

Press the OK cursor button .

4-12.

The LCD displays END to indicate that programming

is completed.

5. To program another macro, repeat the procedure in steps 3 to 4-12.

To exit macro programming, press the M button

The

When the macro are programmed 20 operations or

Edit the macro so that it has 20 operations or less.

USE

remote control can now be operated.

indicator displays to indicate that the

more, the display returns macro menu.

EXECUTING MACRO PROGRAMS

1 2 3

MACRO

PAGE

Press the M button shortly.

The macro menu is displayed.

Press the D1 (M-01) direct button .

Check that the operations of the program are

executed step by step.

The name of the operation button is displayed on

MACRO

PAGE

the LCD.

MACRO

PAGE

• The programmed section is indicated by &. The bar indicator moves to indicate the progress of the program.

Select DVD source → PLAY transmit → Interval

time: 2 seconds → Select TV → TV INPUT transmit

Select AMP → AUTO transmit → End

→

• To cancel transmission of the program while it is in progress, press any button.

CHANGING NAMES OF MACRO PROGRAMS

Under the factory default settings, the names of the macro programs are set from M-01 to M-20, but you can change them to any desired name. The text can have up to six characters, and it is entered using the numeric buttons. This example shows how to change the M-01 name to MOVIE.

1 2 3

LEARN

MACRO

USE

PAGE

4 5 6

NAME

MACRO

PAGE

NAME

MACRO

PAGE

1. Hold down the M button for three seconds or more.

The menu is displayed.

LEARN

MACRO

PAGE

NAME

MACRO

PAGE

ENGLISH

2. Press the D4 (MACRO) direct button.

The macro menu is displayed. The

3. Press the D1 (M-01) direct button .

The NAME is displayed.

4. Press the D3 (NAME) direct button .

The “ ” blinks to indicate that rewriting is possible.

MACRO

indicator displays and

LEARN

blinks.

5. Press the 5 numeric button to select M. Press the 2 cursor button to next.

The “ ” blinks to indicate that rewriting is possible.

Press the 5 numeric button to select O.

Repeat steps 6 and 7, and then enter V, I, E

and “ (space)”.

• To make changes in the text while entering it, use the 1 or 2 cursor buttons to move to the blinking section.

After making the changes, press the OK cursor

button.

• To change the names of other macro programs, repeat the procedure in steps 3 to 9.

To exit, press the M button.

10.

ERASING STEPS OF MACRO PROGRAMS

This example shows how to delete the TV and INPUT steps from the following macro programmed to M-01. The program is changed from DVD → PLAY → TIME → TV → INPUT → AMP → AUTO to DVD → PLAY → TIME → AMP → AUTO.

1 2 3

LEARN

MACRO

USE

PAGE

LEARN

MACRO

PAGE

4 5 6

NAME

MACRO

PAGE

Hold down the M button for three seconds or

more.

The menu is displayed.

NAME

MACRO

PAGE

NAME

MACRO

PAGE

Press the D4 (MACRO) direct button.

The macro menu is displayed. The

MACRO

indicator displays and

LEARN

blinks.

3. Press the D1 (M-01) direct button.

Press the D5 (EDIT) direct button.

The LCD displays DVD, and the step position is

indicated by 9.

The programmed section is indicated by &.

5. Press the 2 cursor button to display TV.

Press the CLEAR button .

The LCD displays CLEAR, and TV and INPUT are

deleted.

When deleting steps from a macro program, the

operations performed for a source after switching to the source are also deleted.

If the

The & indicator for the step is also changed.

CLEAR

position, only the INPUT step is deleted.

button is pressed at the INPUT

• To check the modiﬁ ed steps, press the 1 or 2 cursor button.

To exit, press the M button.

When ﬁ nished, to change another macro program,

press the OK cursor button to return to the menu, and then repeat the procedure for steps 3 to 6.

OVERWRITING STEPS IN MACRO PROGRAMS

This example shows how to change the macro programmed to M-01 from DVD → PLAY → AMP → AUTO to DVD → PLAY → TV → INPUT.

4 6 7

LEARN

MACRO

PAGE

Hold down the M button for three seconds or

more.

The menu is displayed.

Press the D4 (MACRO) direct button.

The macro menu is displayed. The

The LCD displays DVD, and the step position is

The programmed section is indicated by &.

MACRO

Press the D1 (M-01) direct button. Press the D5 (EDIT) direct button.

indicated by 9.

Press the 2 cursor button so that AMP is

displayed.

LEARN

MACRO

PAGE

indicator displays and

LEARN

MACRO

LEARN

PAGE

blinks.

Press the TV source button.

TV blinks for 0.5 seconds.

Press the D1 (INPUT) direct button.

INPUT blinks for 0.5 seconds. TV and INPUT are overwritten.

• To check the modiﬁ ed steps, press the 1 or 2 cursor button.

To exit, press the M button.

When ﬁ nished, to change another macro program,

press the OK cursor button to return to the menu, and then repeat the procedure for steps 3 to 8.

INSERTING STEPS IN MACRO PROGRAMS

This example shows how to change the macro programmed to M-01 from DVD → PLAY → AMP → AUTO to DVD → PLAY → TV → INPUT → AMP → AUTO

4 6 8

LEARN

MACRO

PAGE

Hold down the M button for three seconds or

more.

The menu is displayed.

Press the D4 (MACRO) direct button.

The macro menu is displayed. The

The LCD displays DVD, and the step position is

The programmed section is indicated by &.

MACRO

Press the D1 (M-01) direct button . Press the D5 (EDIT) direct button .

indicated by 7.

Press the 2 cursor button so that AMP is

NAME

MACRO

PAGE

indicator displays and

displayed.

Press the MEMO button.

Press the TV source button.

TV blinks for 0.5 seconds

Press the D1 (INPUT) direct button.

INPUT blinks for 0.5 seconds. TV and INPUT are inserted.

Press the OK cursor button.

• To check the modiﬁ ed steps, press the 1 or 2 cursor button.

To exit, press the M button.

10.

When ﬁ nished, to change another macro program,

press the OK cursor button to return to the menu, and then repeat the procedure for steps 3 to 9.

LEARN

MACRO

blinks.

PAGE

CLEARING MACRO PROGRAMS

When clearing macros, the macros programmed to the button are erased. Modiﬁ ed macro names are also returned to the factory default settings. This example shows how to clear a macro with the name MOVIE programmed to M-02.

1 4 5

LEARN

MACRO

PAGE

Press the M button for three second or more.

The macro menu is displayed.

Press the D4 (MACRO) direct button .

The macro menu is displayed.

Press the D2 (MOVIE) direct button while

MACRO

PAGE

holding down the CLEAR button.

Press the D4 (YES) direct button to clear the

macro.

To cancel the clearing operation, press the NO (D5

button).

To exit, press the M button.

When ﬁ nished, to change another macro program,

press the OK cursor button to return to the menu, and then repeat the procedure for steps 2 to 4.

LEARN

MACRO

PAGE

SETTING THE MACRO TIMER

Setting the macro timer enables the macro program to automatically turn the power for a device on or off or perform other operations. In the settings, you can select to execute the macro timer everyday or only once. Be sure to set the clock to the correct time before using the timer. The macro timer can only be set for one program a day. This example shows how to use the timer only once at 20:35 to execute a macro programmed to M-01.

2 3 4

LEARN

MACRO

USE

PAGE

123

PAGE

5 6

LEARN

MACRO

PAGE

123

Hold down the M button for three seconds or

more.

The menu is displayed.

Press the > button to display the third page

LEARN

MACRO

PAGE

123

TIMER menu.

Press the D2 (ONCE?) direct button.

The M-TMR menu is displayed on the LCD.

• To cancel timer operation, press CANCEL.

Press the D1 (M-01) direct button .

The time which is set previously is displayed.

Press the 2 and 0 numeric button to set the

hour indicator to 20.

Press the 3 and 5 numeric button to set the

minute indicator to 35.

Press the OK cursor button.

This ﬁ nalizes the time.

To exit, press the M button.

To cancel the macro timer, return to the TIMER

menu and press the D5 (CANCEL) and then press D1 (M-01).

LEARN

MACRO

123

EXECUTING THE MACRO TIMER

The macro program starts when the time that was set is reached. The TIMER whenever the macro timer is activated.

Note:

• To execute the macro timer, place the remote control facing the infrared sensor of the device to be operated. If the remote control is not in a suitable position, it may not operate the device properly.

indicator lights up

CLONE MODE

CREATING COPIES USING CLONE MODE

All of the codes programmed to the RC8001SR remote control can be copied to another RC8001SR using a few simple operations.

• The remote control can copy the entire contents or the contents for speciﬁ c source buttons.

• When copying the entire contents, all programmed codes, modiﬁ ed names, programmed macros, and signal transmission intervals are copied.

When copying the contents for source buttons, the programmed codes and modiﬁ ed names are copied.

Note:

• The clone function can only be used for copying when using the same model (RC8001SR) for both the transmitting and receiving remote control.

COPYING ENTIRE CONTENTS

3 4 9

NAME

PAGE

123

PAGE

123

5 6 9

PAGE

123

PAGE

123

PAGE

123

Place the receiver sensor of the receiving

remote control (top) so that it is facing the transmitter of the transmitting remote control (top) at a distance of about 5 cm (2 inches).

Hold down the M button of the transmitting

remote control for three seconds or more.

The menu is displayed.

Press the > button to display the fourth page

CLONE menu.

Press the D3 (TX) direct button.

The transmitting side is now ready.

Hold down the M button of the receiving remote

control for three seconds or more.

The menu is displayed.

Press the > button to display the fourth page

CLONE menu.

Press the D1 (RX) direct button.

The receiving side is now ready.

Press the OK cursor button on the receiving

remote control.

Press the OK cursor button on the transmitting

remote control.

When copying is started, the bar indicators on both

LCDs start to move from the left to the right.

• When the copying operation is completed, TX OK is displayed on the LCD of the transmitting remote control, and RX OK is displayed on the LCD of the receiving remote control.

• Do not touch either of the remote controls during the copying operation. Doing so could cause copying to fail.

• If the copying fails in the middle of the copying process, RX ERROR is displayed on the receiving remote control. Check and perform steps 1 to 7 again.

• Copying takes about three minutes to complete when the transmitting remote control has been programmed to 100% capacity.

Once copying is completed, press the M button

10.

on both remote controls.

COPYING BY SOURCE

The 12 sources can be copied on a source by source basis. You can select from up to 12 source types.

6 7 8

LEARN

PAGE

123

PAGE

123

Place the receiver sensor of the receiving

123

remote control (top) so that it is facing the transmitter of the transmitting remote control (top) at a distance of about 5 cm (2 inches).

Hold down the M button of the transmitting

remote control for three seconds or more.

The menu is displayed.

Press the > button to display the fourth page

CLONE menu.

Press the D3 (TX) direct button.

The transmitting side is now ready.

Hold down the M button of the receiving remote

control for three seconds or more.

Press the > button to display the fourth page

CLONE menu.

Press the D2 (RX-S) direct button.

Press the source button to be copied.

The receiving side is now ready. The name of the source which was pressed is

displayed on the LCD.

• Each time the source button is pressed, the name is displayed on the LCD.

Press the OK cursor button on the receiving

remote control.

Press the OK cursor button on the transmitting

10.

remote control.

When copying is started, the bar indicators on both

LCDs start to move from the left to the right.

• When the copying operation is completed, TX OK is displayed on the LCD of the transmitting remote control, and RX OK is displayed on the LCD of the receiving remote control.

• Do not touch either of the remote controls during the copying operation. Doing so could cause copying to fail.

• If the copying fails in the middle of the copying process, ERROR is displayed on the remote control.

Check and perform steps 1 to 7 again.

ENGLISH

Once copying is completed, press the M button

11.

on both remote controls.

SETUP

SETTING THE LIGHTING TIME

• The LCD lights up when the LIGHT buttons are

pressed. The LCD remains lit while the pressed button is held down, and it goes off when the button is released.

• The LCD continues to light up if another button is pressed while it is lit or if pressed within two seconds after the light goes off.

• The lighting time can be set in one-second units from 0 to 60 seconds.

The LIGHT buttons have light-absorbing properties that enable them to store light. If the buttons are no longer illuminated in a dimly lit environment, bring the buttons near a ﬂ uorescent lamp or other light source for a sufﬁ cient amount of time. This should illuminate the buttons again.

• The LIGHT buttons consist of a LIGHT1 and LIGHT2 button, and they both perform the same operation.

The factory default lighting time is set to 15 seconds.

This example shows how to set the lighting time to 20 seconds.

2 3 4

LEARN

PAGE

Hold down the M button for three seconds or

more.

The menu is displayed.

Press the > button to display the second page

SETUP menu.

Press the D1 (LIGHT) direct button .

The LIGHT is displayed on the LCD

Press the 3 or 4 cursor button to set the

lighting time.

Press the OK cursor button to enter the lighting

time.

Once the setting is finished, press the M

button.

123

LEARN

123

SETTING THE MACRO INTERVAL TIME

When a macro program is executed, control signals are transmitted in sequence. This transmission interval (interval time) can be set in 0.5-seconds units from 0.5 to 5 seconds. If the interval time is set in this Setup mode, the interval times for all programmed macros are changed. If necessary, use EDIT (see page 60) in the macro program to change the individual transmission times. The factory default setting for the transmission interval is 1 second.

This example shows how to set the interval time to 5 seconds.

2 3 4

LEARN

PAGE

Hold down the M button for three seconds or

more.

The menu is displayed.

Press the > button to display the second page

SETUP menu.

Press the D2 (I-TIME) direct button.

Press the 3 or 4 cursor button to set the

interval time.

Holding down the cursor button fast-forwards the

time indicator.

Press the OK cursor button to enter the interval

time.

Once the setting is finished, press the M

button.

123

LEARN

123

ADJUSTING THE DISPLAY CONTRAST

The contrast of the LCD can be adjusted. Adjust for maximum visibility according to your viewing environment.

2 3 4

LEARN

PAGE

Hold down the M button for three seconds or

more.

The menu is displayed.

Press the > button to display the second page

SETUP menu.

Press the D3 (CONT) direct button .

Press the 3 or 4 cursor button and set the

display contrast for maximum visibility.

The adjustment has 10 levels. The factory default setting for the contrast is the ﬁ fth

level.

Press the OK cursor button to enter the display

contrast.

Once the setting is finished, press the M

button.

123

LEARN

123

TROUBLESHOOTING

In case of trouble, check the following before calling for service:

1. Are the connections made properly ?

2. Are you operating the unit properly following the user’s guide ?

3. Are the power ampliﬁ ers and speaker working properly ?

If the unit does not operate properly, check items shown in the following table. If your trouble cannot be recovered with the remedy actions listed in the following table, malfunction of the internal circuitry is suspected; immediately unplug the power cable and contact your dealer, nearest Marantz authorized dealer or the Marantz Service Center in your country.

SYMPTOM CAUSE REMEDY

SR7001 cannot be turned up.

No sound and picture are output even when power is on.

No speaker output. The headphones are connected to the

Incorrect Audio or Video for selected source.

Incorrect Audio from a channel.

No Audio output from the center channel speaker.

No Audio output from the surround speakers.

No Audio output from the surround back speakers.

The power plug is not connected.

Mute is on.

The input cable is not connected correctly.

The master volume control is turned all the way down.

The function selector position is wrong.

headphone jack.

Input cable connected incorrectly.

Speaker cable connected incorrectly.

The center speaker cable connection is incomplete.

STEREO has been selected for Surround mode.

Center = NONE has been selected in SETUP mode.

The surround speaker cable connection is incomplete.

STEREO has been selected for Surround mode.

Surround = NONE has been selected in SETUP mode.

The surround back speaker cable connection is incomplete.

Surround mode is not EX/ES mode.

Surround back = NONE has been selected in SPEAKERS SIZE SETUP

Connect the power plug to the outlet.

Cancel mute using the remote control unit.

See the connection diagram and connect the cables correctly.

Adjust the master volume.

Select correct position.

Disconnect the headphones. (Speakers will not output sound when headphones are connected.)

Connect the cable correctly by referring to the connection diagram.

Connect the cable correctly.

When STEREO is selected for Surround mode, no sound will be output from the center speaker. Set another Surround mode.

Make the correct setting.

Connect the cable correctly.

When STEREO has been selected for Surround mode, no sound will be output from the surround speaker. Set another Surround mode.

Make the correct setting.

Connect the cable correctly.

Set surround mode EX/ES.

Make the correct setting.

SYMPTOM CAUSE REMEDY

Can not select EX/ES mode. Surround center= NONE has been

Can not select Pro Logic II x mode.

Can not select Neo:6 mode. Input signal is incompatible.

Can not select CSII mode. Input signal is incompatible.

No output to Subwoofer Out. Subwoofer = NONE has been selected

Noise is produced during DTS-encoded CD or laser disc play.

A speciﬁ c channel does not produce output.

FM or AM reception fails. Antenna connection is incomplete.

Noise is heard during AM reception.

Noise is heard during FM reception.

Cannot get programmed station when the PRESET button is pressed.

Control with the remote control unit fails.

Auto Setup (SPEAKER SETUP) is not working.

Note:

• After “PROTECT” appears on the unit’s display, the standby indicator may start ﬂ ashing. If it does, there is a problem in the unit or the connection. If this problem reoccurs even when power is activated from the remote control unit, call for servicing.

selected in SPEAKERS SIZE SETUP

Input signal is incompatible.

in SETUP mode.

Analog has been selected for input.

Nothing recorded on source.

Reception is affected by other electrical ﬁ elds.

The radio waves from the broadcasting station are weak.

Preset data has been erased.

Batteries are consumed.

Remote controller's function-key setting is wrong.

The distance between this SR7001 and the remote commander is too far.

Something is blocking SR7001 and the remote commander.

Headphones are connected.

Make the correct setting.

Use 5.1channel source.

Use 2 channel Dolby Digital input signal, PCM input signal or analog input signal.

Select Subwoofer = YES.

Be sure to perform digital connection, select digital input, then play.

Check the encoded channel on the source side.

Correctly connect the indoor FM and AM antennas to FM and AM antenna outlets.

Try changing location where the AM indoor antenna is set up.

Install an FM outdoor antenna.

Disconnecting power plug for long periods of time will erase preset data. If that happens, input the preset data again.

Replace all the batteries with new ones.

Select different position from which equipment will be controlled.

Move closer to this SR7001.

Remove offending object.

Disconnect the headphones.

ENGLISH

HDMI

SYMPTOM CAUSE REMEDY

The display does not appear over an HDMI connection.

Time is needed for the display of an HDMI connection to appear.

The connected monitor or projector does not support HDCP.

The HDMI input of on the TV is not on.

The HDMI output on the source component (DVD, Set Top Box, etc.) is not on.

The HDMI mode is not correctly set on the SR7001/SR8001.

The HDMI output video resolution of the source component (DVD, Set Top Box, etc.) does not match the TV speciﬁ cations.

The device is connected with a non-standard HDMI cable.

Power to the SR7001/SR8001 is off. (When the SR7001/SR8001 is on standby, HDMI connections cannot be turned on.)

The connection between HDMI components was not authenticated.

The connection is being authenticated between the HDMI devices.

Set HDMI input so that it turns on, as explained in the TV's instruction manual.

Set HDMI output so that it turns on, as explained in the source component's instruction manual.

Set HDMI input on the FUNC INPUT SETUP menu as explained on page 24.

Set the resolution so that it matches, as explained in the instruction manuals of both components.

A 5 m or shorter cable is recommended to ensure stable operation and prevent image quality deterioration.

Turn on the power to the SR7001/ SR8001.

Shut off and then turn the power back on to the SR7001/SR8001, TV and source component.

There is nothing wrong with the system. Some HDMI devices require time for authentication.

Audio is not played back over an HDMI connection.

DVD-Audio is not played back over an HDMI connection.

The HDMI audio output of the source component (DVD, Set Top Box, etc.) is not on.

The signal format of the source component (DVD, Set Top Box, etc.) is not supported by the SR7001/SR8001.

The SR7001/SR8001 is set to the HDMI audio “THROUGH” mode.

The DVD player does not support CPPM, therefore it cannot output HDMI audio.

Set the HDMI audio output so that it turns on, as explained in the source component's instruction manual.

Set the HDMI audio output so that it can connect to the SR7001/SR8001, as explained in the source component's instruction manual.

In the “THROUGH” mode, sound is not produced from the SR7001/SR8001. Set it to “ENABLE”. (see page 35)

• Use a DVD-Audio player that supports CPPM.

• Turn on PCM downsampling on the DVD player.

• Use an analog connection.

GENERAL MALFUNCTION

If the equipment malfunctions, this may be because an electrostatic discharge or AC line interference has corrupted the information in the equipment memory circuits. Therefore:

- disconnect the plug from the AC line supply

- after waiting at least three minutes, reconnect the plug to the AC line supply

- re-attempt to operate the equipment

Memory backup

• In case a power outage occurs or the power cord is accidentally unplugged, the SR7001 is equipped with a backup function to prevent memory data such as the preset memory from being erased.

HOW TO RESET THE UNIT

AV SURROUND RECEIVER SR8001

INPUT SELECTOR

STANDBY

POWER ON/OFF

PURE DIRECT

SURR DIRECT

AUTO

SLEEP

DSD

SURROUND

MODE AUTO

MULTI

7.1CH INPUT

PURE DIRECT THX

PHONES

SURROUND

V-OFFDISP MULTI AUTO TUNED ST SPKR A B

PEAK ANALOG

ATT

DIGITAL

NIGHT

DISC 6.1 MT X 6.1

LCR

LFE

AAC

PCM

SL S SR

MULTI

MEMORY CLEAR

BAND

SPEAKER

T-MODE

DISPLAY

SPEAKERS

MultEQ

A/B

ENTER

EXIT

MIC

VOLUME

DOWN

AUX 1 INPUT

DIGITAL

RLVIDEO

S-VIDEO

AUDIO

Should the operation or display seem to be abnormal, reset the unit with the following procedure. The SR7001 is turned on, press and hold the MULTI + SPEAKERS A/B buttons simultaneously for 3 seconds or more. Remember that the procedure will reset the settings of the function selector, Surround mode, delay time, TUNER PRESET etc., to their initial settings.

TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS

FM TUNER SECTION

Frequency Range ................................87.5 – 108.0 MHz

Usable Sensitivity ............................IHF 1.8 µV/16.4 dBf

Signal to Noise Ratio ................... Mono/Stereo 75/70 dB

Distortion ......................................Mono/Stereo 0.2/0.3 %

Stereo Separation .........................................1 kHz 45 dB

Alternate Channel Selectivity .................± 300 kHz 60 dB

Image Rejection .........................................98 MHz 70 dB

Tuner Output Level ........... 1 kHz, ± 75 kHz Dev 800 mV

AM TUNER SECTION

Frequency Range ...................................531 – 1602 kHz

Signal to Noise Ratio ..............................................50 dB

Usable Sensitivity .........................................Loop 400µV

Distortion ...................................400Hz, 30 % Mod. 0.5 %

Selectivity .................................................± 20 kHz 70 dB

AUDIO SECTION

SR7001 Power Output (20 Hz – 20 kHz/THD=0.08%)

Front L&R ..........................................8 ohms 110 W / Ch

Center ................................................ 8 ohms 110 W / Ch

Surround L&R .................................... 8 ohms 110 W / Ch

Surround Back L&R ........................... 8 ohms 110 W / Ch

Front L&R ..........................................6 ohms 140 W / Ch

Center ................................................6 ohms 140 W / Ch

Surround L&R ....................................6 ohms 140 W / Ch

Surround Back L&R ...........................6 ohms 140 W / Ch

SR8001 Power Output (20 Hz – 20 kHz/THD=0.08%)

Front L&R ..........................................8 ohms 125 W / Ch

Center ................................................8 ohms 125 W / Ch

Surround L&R ....................................8 ohms 125 W / Ch

Surround Back L&R ...........................8 ohms 125 W / Ch

Front L&R ..........................................6 ohms 160 W / Ch

Center ................................................6 ohms 160 W / Ch

Surround L&R ....................................6 ohms 160 W / Ch

Surround Back L&R ...........................6 ohms 160 W / Ch

Input Sensitivity/Impedance ...............168 mV/ 47 Kohms

Signal to Noise Ratio(Analog Input / Pure Direct) .... 105 dB

Frequency Response (Analog Input / Pure Direct)

...........................................8 Hz – 100 kHz (± 3 dB)

(Digital Input / 96 kHz PCM)

............................................ 8 Hz – 45 kHz (± 3 dB)

VIDEO

Television Format ............................................ NTSC/PAL

Input Level/Impedance ...........................1 Vp-p/75 ohms

Output Level/Impedance ......................... 1 Vp-p/75 ohms

Video Frequency Response .......5 Hz to 8 MHz (– 1 dB)

Video Frequency (Component)

S/N .......................................................................... 60 dB

.... 5 Hz to 80 MHz (– 1 dB)

HDMI

Version ...........................................................1.2 [INPUT]

...........................................................1.1 [OUTPUT]

GENERAL

Power Requirement ................................AC 230 V 50 Hz

Power Consumption ...............................760 W(SR7001)

........................................................790 W(SR8001)

Weight .................................................. 15.0 kg (SR7001)

.....................................................15.0 kg (SR8001)

DIMENSIONS

440 mm

AV SURROUND RECEIVER SR8001

INPUT SELECTOR

PURE DIRECT

SLEEP

AUTO

DSD

SURROUND

MODE AUTO

STANDBY

POWER ON/OFF

PURE DIRECT THX

PHONES

SURROUND

V-OFFDISP MULTI AUTO TUNED ST SPKR A B

PEAK ANALOG

ATT

DIGITAL

SURR DIRECT

NIGHT

DISC 6.1 MTX 6.1 EQ

LCR

LFE

AAC

PCM

SL S SR

MULTI

MEMORY CLEAR

BAND

SPEAKER

MULTI

T-MODE

7.1CH INPUT

DISPLAY

MultEQ

ENTER

EXIT

MIC

VOLUME

DOWN

SPEAKERS

A/B

AUX 1 INPUT

DIGITAL

RLVIDEO

S-VIDEO

AUDIO

ACCESSORIES

Remote Control Unit RC8001SR ................................... 1

Microphone ................................................................... 1

AAA-size batteries ........................................................ 3

FM Antenna ................................................................... 1

AM Loop Antenna .......................................................... 1

Front AUX Jack Cover .................................................. 1

AC cable ....................................................................... 1

Speciﬁ cations subject to change without prior notice.

22 mm354 mm

396 mm

20 mm

184 mm

14 mm 170 mm

ENGLISH

SETUP CODES

AMPLIFIER

Source button name : AMP

Brand name Setup code Amstrad 0105 Arcam 0296 Audiolab 0296 Carver 0296 GE 0105 Genexxa 0422 Grundig 0296 Harman/Kardon 0919 JVC 0358 Left Coast 0919 Linn 0296 Magnavox 0296 Marantz 0919, 0296 Micromega 0296 Myryad 0296 Optimus 0422 Panasonic 0335 Philips 0919, 0296 Pioneer 0040 Polk Audio 0919, 0296 Realistic 0422 Revox 0296 Sony 0247 Soundesign 0105 Technics 0335 Thorens 0296 Victor 0358 Wards 0105, 0040 Yamaha 0381

RECEIVER/TUNER

Source button name : AMP, TUNER

Brand name Setup code ADC 0558 Aiwa 1432, 0185, 1116, 1415, 1668 Alco 1417 Anam 1636 Apex Digital 1284 Audiolab 1216 Audiotronic 1216 Audiovox 1417 Bose 1256 Cambridge 1397 Soundworks Capetronic 0558 Carver 1216, 1116 Centrex 1284 Denon 1387 Ferguson 0558 Fine Arts 1216 Grundig 1216

RECEIVER/TUNER

Source button name : AMP, TUNER

Brand name Setup code Harman/ Kardon 0137, 1331 Integra 0162, 1325 JBL 0137, 1333 JVC 0101, 0558, 1401, 1522 KLH 1417, 1439 Kenwood 1340, 1054 MCS 0066 Magnavox 1216, 1296, 0558, 1116 Marantz 1216, 0066, 1116, 1316 Micromega 1216 Musicmagic 1116 Myryad 1216 NAD 0347 Norcent 1416 Onkyo 0162, 0869, 1325 Optimus 1050, 0558 Panasonic 1545, 0066, 1315, 1790 Philips 1216, 1296, 1116, 1293, 1295, 1310, 1316 Pioneer 1050, 0041, 0558, 1411 Polk Audio 1316 Proscan 1281 Quasar 0066 RCA 1050, 1636, 1281, 0558, 1417 Saba 0558 Sansui 1116 Schneider 0558 Sony 1085, 0185, 1185, 1685, 1785 Stereophonics Sunﬁ re 1340 Teac 1417 Technics 1335, 1545, 0066, 1336 Telefunken 0558 Thomson 1281 Thorens 1216 Uher 0558 Venturer 1417 Victor 0101 Wards 0185, 0041 Yamaha 0203, 1203, 1358

1050

CABLE

Source button name : AUX1

Brand name Setup code ABC 0030, 0035 Americast 0926 Bell South 0926 Birmingham Cable 0303 Communications British Telecom Cable & Wireless 1095 Daeryung 0904, 1904, 0504, 0035 Director 0503 Filmnet 0470 General 0503, 0837, 0303,

0030

Source button name : AUX1

Brand name Setup code GoldStar 0171 Hamlin 0036, 0300 Instrument 0030 Jerrold 0503, 0837, 0303, 0030 LG 0171 MNet 0470 Memorex 0027 Motorola 0503, 0837, 0303, 1133 NTL 1095 Noos 0844 Ono 1095 PVP Stereo 0030 Visual Matrix Pace 0264, 1087, 1095 Panasonic 0027, 0035, 0134 Paragon 0027 Philips 0332, 0344 Pioneer 0904, 1904, 0171, 0560 Pulsar 0027 Quasar 0027 Regal 0306, 0300 Runco 0027 Sagem 0844 Samsung 0027, 0171 Scientiﬁ c Atlanta 0904, 1904, 0504, 0035 Sony 1033 Starcom 0030 Supercable 0303 TS 0030 Tele+1 0470 Telewest 1095 Torx 0030 Toshiba 0027 Trans PX 0303 United Cable 0030 Zenith 0027, 0552, 0926

SATELLITE

Source button name : DSS

Brand name Setup code @sat 1327 ABsat 0150 Alba 0482 AlphaStar 0799 Amstrad 0874 Aston 0169, 1156 Astro 0200 Atsat 1327 Avalon 0423 Blaupunkt 0200 British Sky 0874, 1202 Broadcasting Canal Digital 0880 Canal Satellite

0880

CABLE

SATELLITE

Source button name : DSS

Brand name Setup code Canal+ 0880 Chaparral 0243 Citycom 1203 Connexions 0423 Crossdigital 1136 Cyrus 0227 D-box 0750, 1154 DMT 1102 DNT 0227, 0423 Daeryung 0423 Daewoo 1323 Digenius 0326 DirecTV 0419, 0593, 0666, 1169, 0274, 0776, 1776, 0751,

Dish Network System 103 2, 0802 DishPro 1032, 0802 Distratel 0111 Dream Multimedia 1264 Echostar 1032, 0802, 0194, 0423, 0637, 0880, 0898, 1113 Engel 1044 Expressvu 0802 FTE 0890 Finlux 0482 Fracarro 0898 Fuba 0423 GE 0593 GOI 0802 Galaxis 0890, 1138 General Instrument 0896 Gold Box 0880 Grundig 0200, 0874 HTS 0802 Hirschmann 0200, 0423 Hitachi 0846, 0482 Hughes

1169, 0776, 1776 Network Systems Humax 0890, 1203 InVideo 0898 JVC 0802 Kathrein 0150, 0200, 0227, 0276, 0685, 1248 Kreiselmeyer 0200 Labgear 1323 Logix 1044 Lorenzen 0326 Magnavox 0751, 0749 Manhattan 0482, 1044, 1110 Marantz 0227 MediaSat 0880 Memorex 0751 Metronic 0111 Mitsubishi 0776 Motorola 0896 Myryad 0227 Next Level 0896

0846, 1883, 1103, 1136

SATELLITE

Source button name : DSS

Brand name Setup code Nokia 0482, 0750, 0778, 1154, 1250, 1750 OctalTV 1032 Orbitech 1127 Pace 0482, 0874, 1202, 1350 Panasonic 0274, 0728, 0874, 1347 Panda 0482 Paysat 0751 Philips 1169, 0776, 1776, 0751, 1103, 0749, 0160, 0227,

0482, 0880 Pioneer 0880 Promax 0482 Proscan 0419, 0593 RCA 0419, 0593, 0882, 0170 RFT 0227 RadioShack 0896 Radiola 0227 Radix 0423 SKY 0883, 0874, 1202 SM Electronic 122 7 Sabre 0482 Sagem 0847, 1141, 1280 Samsung 1303, 1136, 1044, 1319 Sat Control 1327 Satstation 1110 Schwaiger 1138 Seemann 0423 Siemens 0200 Sony 0666, 1666, 0874 Star Choice 0896 Strong 1327 TPS 0847, 1280 Tantec 0482 TechniSat 1126, 1127 Telestar 1127 Thomson 0482, 0880, 1073, 1318 Topﬁ eld 1233 Toshiba 0776, 1776, 0817 UltimateTV 0419, 0666 Uniden 0751, 0749 Universum 0200 Ventana 0227 Wisi 0200, 0423, 0482 XSat 0150 Zehnder 1102 Zenith 0883, 1883

TAPE DECK

Source button name : TAPE

Brand name Setup code Aiwa 0056 Carver 0056 Grundig 0056 Harman/Kardon 0056 Magnavox 0056 Marantz 0056 Myryad 0056 Optimus 0054 Philips 0056 Pioneer 0054 Polk Audio 0056 RCA 0054 Revox 0056 Sansui 0056 Sony 0270 Thorens 0056 Wards 0054

LASER DISK

Source button name : AUX2

Brand name Setup code Carver 0091 Denon 0086 Marantz 0091 Mitsubishi 0086 NAD 0086 Nagsmi 0086 Optimus 0086 Philips 0091 Pioneer 0086 Salora 0091 Sony 0228 Telefunken 0086

CD/CD-R PLAYER

Source button name : CD, CDR, MD

Brand name Setup code Aiwa 0184 Arcam 0184 Audio Research 0 184 AudioTon 0184 Audiolab 0184 Audiomeca 0184 Cairn 0184 California Audio Labs 0056 Carver 0184, 0206 Cyrus 0184 DKK 0027 DMX Electronics

0184 Denon 0900 Dynamic Bass

0206 Emerson 0332 Fisher 0206

CD/CD-R PLAYER

Source button name : CD, CDR, MD

Brand name Setup code Genexxa 0059, 0332 Goodmans 0332 Grundig 0184 Harman/ Kardon 0184, 0200 Hitachi 0059 JVC 0099 Kenwood 0708, 0653, 0055, 0064 Krell 0184 LXI 0332 Linn 0184 MCS 0056 Magnavox 0184, 0332 Marantz 0653, 0056, 0184 Matsui 0184 Memorex 0332 Meridian 0184 Micromega 0184 Miro 0027 Mission 0184 Myryad 0184 NAD 0027 NSM 0184 Naim 0184 Onkyo 0895 Optimus 0027, 0059, 0064, 0206, 0332 Panasonic 0056 Philips 0653, 0184 Pioneer 0059, 0332 Polk Audio 0184 Proton 0184 QED 0184 Quad 0184 Quasar 0056 RCA 0059, 0206, 0332 Realistic 0206 Revox 0184 Rotel 0184 SAE 0184 Sansui 0184, 0332 Sanyo 0206 Scott 0332 Sears 0332 Sharp 0888, 0064 Simaudio 0184 Sonic Frontiers Sony 0517, 0027 Symphonic 0332 T

AG McLaren Tandy 0059 Technics 0056 Thorens 0184 Thule 0184 Universum 0184 Victor 0099 Wards 0184

0184

Source button name : TV

Brand name Setup code MARANTZ 0001 TV1 (TV, VDP) MARANTZ 0002 TV2 (Plasma) AGB 0543 AOC 0478, 0120, 0207, 0087, 0057, 0205, 0036, 0119,

ASA 0131 AWA 0036 Acura 0036 Addison 0119, 0135, 0680 Admiral 0120, 0490, 0190 Advent 0788 Aiko 0119 Akai 0839, 0729, 0057, 0036, 0235, 0388, 0543 Akura 0291 Alba 0036, 0064, 0398, 0695 America Action Ampro 0778 Amstrad 0198, 0036, 0064, 0398, 0439, 0460, 0543 Anam 0277, 0207, 0036 Anam National Anitech 0036 Apex Digital 0775, 0792, 0794 Audiosonic 0064, 0136 Audiovox 0478, 0207, 0119, 0650 Bang & Olufsen Basic Line 0036 Baur 0064, 0388, 0539 Baysonic 0207 Beaumark 0205 Beko 0397, 0513, 0741, 0742 Bell & Howell 0181 Beon 0064 Blaupunkt 0222 Blue Sky 0695, 1064 Bondstec 0274 Bradford 0207 Brandt 0136, 0362 Broksonic 0263, 0490 Bush 0036, 0064, 0398, 0401, 0695, 1064 CCE 0064 CGE 0274 CTC 0274 CXC 0207 Candle 0057 Carnivale 0057 Carver 0081, 0197 Cascade 0036 Cathay 0064 Celebrity 0027 Celera 0792 Centurion 0064 Changhong 0792 Ching Tai 0036, 0119

0135

0207

0277, 0677

0592

Source button name : TV

Brand name Setup code Chun Yun 0027, 0207, 0036, 0119 Chung Hsin 0207, 0080, 0135 Cimline 0036 Cineral 0478, 0119 Citizen 0087, 0057, 0119 Clarion 0207 Clarivox 0064 Clatronic 0274, 0397 Condor 0347, 0397 Conrac 0835 Contec 0207, 0036 Craig 0207 Crosley 0081 Crown 0207, 0036, 0064, 0397, 0445 Curtis Mathes 0074, 0081, 0181, 0478, 0120, 0087, 0729, 0057,

0172, 0193, 1174, 1374

Daewoo 0181, 0478, 0207, 0057, 0205, 1688, 0036, 0064,

0119, 0135, 0197, 0401, 0650, 0661 Dansai 0064 Dayton 0036 De Graaf 0235, 0575 Decca 0064, 0543 Denon 0172 Digatron 0064 Dixi 0036, 0064 Dumont 0044 Dwin 0747, 0801 ECE 0064 Elbe 0286 Electroband 0027 Elin 0064, 0575 Elite 0347 Elta 0036 Emerson 0181, 0263, 0490, 0207, 0205, 0388, 0650 Envision 0057, 0840 Epson 0860 Erres 0064 Ether 0057, 0036 Etron 0036 Europhon 0543 Ferguson 0064, 0100, 0136, 0265, 0314, 0362, 0587 Fidelity 0388 Finlandia 0235, 0373 Finlux 0064, 0131, 0132, 0373, 0543 Firstar 0263, 0036 Firstline 0036, 0274, 0695 Fisher 0181, 0131, 0235, 0397 Flint 0482 Formenti 0064, 0347 Fortress 0120 Frontech 0190, 0274, 0291 Fujitsu 0710, 0836 Funai 0207, 0198, 0291 Futuretech 0207

Source button name : TV

Brand name Setup code GE 0074, 0078, 0478, 0207, 0057, 0205, 1481, 0119,

GEC 0064, 0543 Gateway 1782, 1783 Geloso 0036 Genexxa 0190 Gibralter 0044, 0057 GoldStar 0181, 0057, 0205, 0064, 0136, 0404 Goodmans 0064, 0398, 0401, 0661 Gorenje 0397 Gradiente 0080, 0197 Graetz 0190, 0388 Granada 0064, 0235, 0366, 0543 Grandin 0637 Grundig 0064, 0222, 0514, 0583, 0614 Grunpy 0207 HCM 0036, 0439 Hallmark 0205 Hankook 0207, 0057, 0205 Hanseatic 0064, 0347, 0388, 0455, 0583 Hantarex 0543 Harman/Kardon Harvard 0207 Havermy 0120 Hello Kitty 0478 Hinari 0036, 0064 Hisawa 0482 Hitachi 0057, 0205, 1172, 0172, 1283, 0036, 0119,

Hua Tun 0036 Huanyu 0401 Hypson 0064, 0291 ICE 0291, 0398 ITS 0398 ITT 0190, 0388, 0575 Imperial 0274, 0397, 0445 Indiana 0064 Inﬁ nity 0081 Ingelen 0190 Inno Hit 0543 Innova 0064 Inteq 0044 Interfunk 0064, 0190, 0274, 0388, 0539 Intervision 0064, 0291, 0404 JBL 0081 JCB 0027 JVC 0490, 0080, 0398, 0680, 0710 Jean 0183, 0078, 0263, 0036, 0119 Jensen 0788 KEC 0207 KTV 0207, 0057 Kaisui 0036 Kapsch 0190 Karcher 0637

0587, 1174, 1374

0081

0132,0136, 0190, 0252, 0383, 0508, 0575, 0605

Source button name : TV

Brand name Setup code Kathrein 0583 Kendo 0064 Kenwood 0057 Kneissel 0286, 0462 Kolin 0207, 0080, 0135 Korpel 0064 Koyoda 0036 L&S Electronic LG 0087, 0057, 0205, 0064, 0135, 0741 LXI 0074, 0081, 0181, 0183, 0205 Leyco 0064, 0291 Liesenk & Tter 0064 Loewe 0539 Luxor 0383, 0388 M Electronic 0036, 0064, 0131, 0132, 0136, 0190, 0314, 0373,

MGA 0177, 0057, 0205 MTC 0087, 0057, 0539 Magnadyne 0274, 0543 Magnafon 0543 Magnavox 0081, 0057, 1481, 1281 Manesth 0291, 0347 Mark 0064 Matsui 0036, 0064, 0235, 0398, 0514, 0543 Matsushita 0277, 0677 Mediator 0064 Medion 0695, 0835, 1064 Megatron 0205, 0172 Memorex 0181, 0277, 0490, 0177, 0205, 0036, 1064 Metz 0474 Micromaxx 0835 Microstar 0835 Midland 0074, 0044, 0078 Minerva 0514 Minoka 0439 Mitsubishi 0181, 0277, 0120, 0263, 0207, 0177, 1277, 0057,

Mivar 0318, 0319, 0543, 0636 Motorola 0120 Multitech 0207, 0036 Myryad 0583 NAD 0183, 0205, 0388, 0893 NEC 0181, 0183, 0078, 0057, 0205, 0036, 0197, 0482,

NEI 0064 NTC 0119 Neckermann 0064, 0583 Netsat 0064 Newave 0120, 0205, 0036, 0119 Nikkai 0064, 0291 Nikko 0057, 0205, 0119 Nokia 0388, 0500, 0507, 0575, 0658 Norcent 0775, 0851 Nordmende 0136, 0314, 0587 Oceanic 0190, 0388

0835

0401, 0507

0205, 0135, 0539, 0863

0524, 1731

Source button name : TV

Brand name Setup code Onwa 0207, 0460 Optimus 0181, 0277, 0193, 0677 Optonica 0120 Orion 0263, 0490, 0064, 0347, 0543 Osaki 0291, 0439 Otto Versand 0064, 0347, 0539, 0583 Palladium 0397, 0445 Panama 0291 Panasonic 0081, 0277, 0078, 0064, 0190, 0677, 1437 Pathe Cinema Pausa 0036 Penney 0074, 0183, 0078, 0087, 0057, 0205, 1374 Perdio 0347 Philco 0081, 0490, 0207, 0057, 0205, 0172, 1688, 0064,

Philips 0081, 0027, 0078, 0057, 0205, 1481, 0064, 0119,

Phonola 0064 Pilot 0057 Pioneer 0193, 0136, 0190, 0314, 0706, 0787, 0893 Portland 0119 Prandoni-Prince 0543 Prima 0788 Prism 0078 Profex 0036, 0388 Proscan 0074 Protech 0036, 0064, 0274, 0291, 0445, 0695 Proton 0057, 0205, 0036 Pulsar 0044 Quasar 0277, 0078, 0677 Quelle 0064, 0131, 0388, 0539 R-Line 0064 RCA 0074, 0027, 0057, 0205, 1474, 1481, 0117, 0119,

RFT 0455 RadioShack 0074, 0181, 0207, 0057, 0205 Radiola 0064 Radiomarelli 0543 Realistic 0181, 0207, 0057, 0205 Rediffusion 0388 Reoc 0741 Revox 0064 Rex 0190, 0286, 0291 Roadstar 0036, 0291, 0445 Runco 0044, 0057, 0524, 0630 SBR 0064 SEG 0291, 0695 SEI 0543 SKY 0064 SSS 0207 Saba 0136, 0190, 0314, 0362 Saccs 0265 Sagem 0637 Saisho 0036, 0291, 0543 Salora 0190, 0383, 0388, 0575

0265, 0347

0274

0135, 0401, 0583, 0717

0706, 1074, 1174, 1274, 1374, 1574

iii

Source button name : TV

Brand name Setup code Sambers 0543 Sampo 0181, 0120, 0057, 0205, 0198, 0036, 0119, 0677,

Samsung 0181, 0087, 0839, 0729, 0057, 0205, 0036, 0064,

Sansei 0478 Sansui 0490 Sanyo 0181, 0207, 0131, 0235, 0366, 0826 Schaub Lorenz Schneider 0064, 0274, 0398, 0695 Scotch 0205 Scott 0263, 0207, 0205 Sears 0074, 0081, 0181, 0183, 0205, 0198 Seleco 0190, 0286 Semivox 0207 Semp 0183 Sharp 0120, 0057, 0677 Shen Ying 0036, 0119 Sheng Chia 0120, 0263, 0036 Siarem 0543 Siemens 0064, 0222 Sinudyne 0543 Skantic 0383 Skygiant 0207 Skyworth 0064 Solavox 0190 Sonitron 0235 Sonoko 0036, 0064 Sonolor 0190, 0235 Sontec 0064 Sony 1127, 0027, 0677, 0861, 1532, 1678 Soundesign 0207, 0205 Soundwave 0064, 0445 Sowa 0183, 0078, 0087, 0205, 0119 Squareview 0198 Standard 0036 Starlite 0207 Stern 0190, 0286 Supreme 0027 Sylvania 0081, 0057, 0198 Symphonic 0207, 0198 Synco 0027, 0478, 0120, 0087, 0205, 0119 Sysline 0064 T + A 0474 TCM 0835 TMK 0205 TNCi 0044 TVS 0490 Tacico 0205, 0036, 0119 Tai Yi 0036 Tandy 0120, 0190 Tashiko 0119, 0677 Tatung 0081, 0181, 0183, 0078, 0087, 0036, 0064, 0543

1782

0117, 0119, 0291, 0397, 0583, 0614, 0645, 0793,

0841

0388

Source button name : TV

Brand name Setup code Teac 0036, 0064, 0291, 0439, 0445, 0482, 0695, 1064 Tec 02 74 Technema 0347 Technics 0277, 0078, 0677 Techwood 0078 Teco 0078, 0120, 0205, 0036, 0119, 0291, 0680 Teknika 0081, 0207, 0177, 0087, 0119 Telefunken 0729, 0136, 0289, 0362, 0652 Telemeister 0347 Teletech 0036 Tensai 0347 Tera 0057 Thomson 1474, 0136, 0314, 0587, 0652 Thorn 0064, 0131, 0388, 0539 Toshiba 0181, 0183, 0087, 1283, 0535, 0645, 0677, 0859,

Triumph 0543 Tuntex 0057, 0036, 0119 Uher 0347 Universum 0064, 0131, 0132, 0291, 0373, 0397, 0519 Vector Research 0057 Vestel 0064 Victor 0277, 0080, 0677, 0680 Videosat 0274 Vidikron 0081 Vidtech 0205 ViewSonic 1782 Vision 0347 Voxson 0190 Waltham 0383 Wards 0081, 0057, 0205, 0893 Watson 0064, 0347 Waycon 0183 White Westinghouse 0490, 0064, 0347,0650 Yamaha 0057, 0796, 0860 Yapshe 0277 Yoko 0064, 0291 Zenith 0044, 0490, 0205, 0119

1383, 1683, 1731

VCR

Source button name : VCR

Brand name Setup code ASA 0064, 0108 Admiral 0075 Adventura 0027 Aiko 0305 Aiwa 0064, 0027, 0334, 0375, 0379 Akai 0068, 0342 Akiba 0099 Alba 0099, 0305, 0342, 0379 America Action American High 0062 Amstrad 0027

0305

VCR

Source button name : VCR

Brand name Setup code Anam 0064, 0267, 0305, 0253, 0507 Anam National 0253, 1589 Anitech 0099 Asha 0267 Asuka 0064 Audiovox 0064, 0305 Baird 0027, 0131, 0068 Basic Line 0099, 0305 Beaumark 0267 Bell & Howell 013 1 Blaupunkt 0253 Brandt 0347 Brandt Electronic 0068 Broksonic 0211, 0375, 1506 Bush 0099, 0305, 0379 CCE 0099, 0305 CGE 0027 Calix 0064 Canon 0062 Carver 0108 Cimline 0099 Cineral 0305 Citizen 0064, 0305, 1305 Colt 0099 Combitech 0379 Craig 0064, 0074, 0267, 0099 Crown 0099, 0305 Curtis Mathes 0087, 0062, 0068, 1062 Cybernex 0267 Cyrus 0108 Daewoo 0072, 0131, 0305, 0669, 1305 Dansai 0099 De Graaf 0069 Decca 0108, 0027 Denon 0069 Dual 0068 Dumont 0108, 0027, 0131 Dynatech 0027 ESC 0267, 0305 Elcatech 0099 Electrohome 0064 Electrophonic 0064 Emerex 0059 Emerson 0062, 0064, 0211, 0267, 0072, 0027, 0070, 0305,

1305, 1506 Ferguson 0068, 0347 Fidelity 0027 Finlandia 0108, 0131 Finlux 0108, 0027, 0069, 0131 Firstline 0064, 0072, 0070, 0099 Fisher 0074, 0131 Fuji 0062, 0060 Fujitsu 0072, 0027 Funai 0027 GE 0087, 0062, 0267, 0834, 1062, 1087

VCR

Source button name : VCR

Brand name Setup code GEC 0108 Garrard 0027 General 0072 Go Video 0459 GoldHand 0099 GoldStar 0064, 0252, 0507, 1264 Goodmans 0064, 0027, 0099, 0305 Gradiente 0027 Graetz 0267, 0131, 0068 Granada 0108, 0131 Grandin 0064, 0027, 0099 Grundig 0108, 0099, 0253, 0374 HCM 0099 HI-Q 0074 Hanseatic 0064 Harley Davidson 0027 Harman/Kardon 0108 Harwood 0099 Hinari 0267, 0099, 0379 Hitachi 0064, 0267, 0027, 0069, 0068 Hughes 0069 Network Systems Hypson 0099 ITT 0267, 0131, 0068 ITV 0064, 0305 Imperial 0027 Interfunk 0108 JVC 0072, 0094, 0068 Jensen 0068 KEC 0064, 0305 KLH 0099 Kaisui 0099 Kenwood 0094, 0068 Kodak 0062, 0064 Kolin 0070, 0068 Korpel 0099 LG 0064, 0072, 0069, 0507 LXI 0064 Lenco 0305 Leyco 0099 Lloyd’s 0027 Loewe 0064, 0108, 1589 Logik 0267, 0099 Luxor 0075, 0131, 0070 M Electronic 0027 MEI 0062 MGA 0267, 0070 MGN Technology 0267 MTC 0267, 0027 Magnasonic 1305 Magnavox 0062, 0066, 0108, 0027, 1808 Magnin 0267 Manesth 0072, 0099 Marantz 0062, 0108 Marta 0064

VCR

Source button name : VCR

Brand name Setup code Matsui 0375, 0379 Matsushita 0062 Medion 0375 Memorex 0062, 0064, 0075, 0066, 0074, 0267, 0027, 0131,

0334, 0375, 1264 Memphis 0099 Metz 0064, 0374, 1589 Minolta 0069 Mitsubishi 0108, 0094, 0070, 0068, 0834 Motorola 0062, 0075 Multitech 0027, 0099 Murphy 0027 Myryad 0108 NAD 0131 NEC 0062, 0064, 0075, 0131, 0094, 0068 National 0253 Neckermann 0108 Nesco 0099 Newave 0064 Nikko 0064 Noblex 0267 Nokia 0267, 0131, 0068 Nordmende 0068, 0347 Oceanic 0027, 0068 Okano 0342, 0375 Olympus 0062, 0253 Optimus 0064, 0075, 0131, 0459 Orion 0211, 0375, 0379, 1506 Osaki 0064, 0027, 0099 Otto Versand 0 108 Palladium 0064, 0068, 0099 Panasonic 0062, 0252, 0253, 0643, 1062, 1589 Pathe Marconi 0068 Penney 0062, 0064, 0267, 0069, 1062, 1264 Pentax 0069 Perdio 0027 Philco 0062 Philips 0062, 0108, 0645, 1108, 1208 Phonola 0108 Pilot 0064 Pioneer 0108, 0069, 0094 Polk Audio 0108 Proﬁ tronic 0267 Proline 0027 Proscan 0087, 1087 Protec 0099 Pulsar 0066 Pye 0108 Quasar 0062, 1062 Quelle 0108 RCA 0087, 0062, 0267, 0069, 0834, 1062, 1087 RadioShack 0027 Radiola 0108 Radix 0064 Randex 0064

VCR

Source button name : VCR

Brand name Setup code Realistic 0062, 0064, 0075, 0074, 0027, 0131 Reoc 0375 ReplayTV 0641, 0643 Rex 0068 Roadstar 0064, 0267, 0099, 0305 Runco 0066 SBR 0108 SEG 0267 SEI 0108 STS 0069 Saba 0068, 0347 Salora 0070 Sampo 0064, 0075 Samsung 0267, 0072, 0459 Sanky 0075, 0066 Sansui 0027, 0094, 0068, 1506 Sanyo 0074, 0267, 0131 Saville 0379 Schaub Lorenz Schneider 0108, 0027, 0099 Scott 0211, 0072, 0070 Sears 0062, 0064, 0074, 0027, 0069, 0131, 1264 Seleco 0068 Semp 0072 Sharp 0075, 0834 Shintom 0131, 0099 Shogun 0267 Siemens 0064, 0108, 0131 Silva 0064 Singer 0072, 0099 Sinudyne 0108 Sonic Blue 0641, 0643 Sontec 0064 Sony 0062, 0059, 0060, 0027, 0663, 1259 Sunkai 0375 Sunstar 0027 Suntronic 0027 Sylvania 0062, 0108, 0027, 0070, 1808 Symphonic 0027 TMK 0267 Tandy 0027, 0131 Tashiko 0064, 0027 Diamond 0795 Digitrex 0699 Emerson 0618 Tatung 0108, 0072, 0027, 0094, 0068 Teac 0027, 0068, 0305, 0334, 0669 Technics 0062, 0253 Teco 0062, 0064, 0075, 0068 Teknika 0062, 0064, 0027 Teleavia 0068 Telefunken 0068, 0347 Tenosal 0099 Tensai 0027 Thomas 0027

0027, 0131, 0068

VCR

Source button name : VCR

Brand name Setup code Thomson 0087, 0094, 0068, 0347 Thorn 0131, 0068 Tivo 0645, 0663 Toshiba 0108, 0072, 0094, 0070, 0068, 0872 Totevision 0064, 0267 Uher 0267 Unitech 0267 Universum 0064, 0108, 0267, 0027 Vector 0072 Victor 0094, 0068 Video Concepts 0072 Videomagic 0064 Videosonic 0267 Villain 0027 Wards 0087, 0062, 0075, 0074, 0108, 0267, 0027, 0069,

0099 White Westinghouse 0099 XR-1000 0062, 0027, 0099 Yamaha 0068 Yamishi 0099 Yokan 0099 Yoko 0267 Zenith 0066, 0060, 0027, 1506

DVD

Source button name : DVD

Brand name Setup code MARANTZ DVD1 0001 MARANTZ DVD2 0002 Acoustic Solutions 0757 Alba 0744 Amstrad 0740 Apex Digital 0699, 0744, 0782, 0821, 0823, 0857, 1127 Blaupunkt 0744 Blue Parade 0598 Bush 0740 Centrex 0699 Clatronic 0815 CyberHome 0741 DVD2000 0548 Daewoo 0811, 0797 Dansai 0797 Decca 0797 Denon 0517 Enterprise 0618 Fisher 0697 GE 0549, 0744 Go Video 0742 GoldStar 0768 Gradiente 0678 Greenhill 0744 Grundig 0566 Hitachi 0600, 0691 Hiteker 0699

DVD

Source button name : DVD

Brand name Setup code JVC 0585, 0650 KLH 0744 Kenwood 0517, 0561 Koss 0678 LG 0768 Limit 0795 Magnavox 0530, 0702 Memorex 0858 MiCO 0750 Microsoft 0549 Mintek 0744 Mitsubishi 0548 Mustek 0757 Nesa 0744 Onkyo 0530 Oritron 0678 Palsonic 0699 Panasonic 0517, 0659, 1389 Philips 0530, 0566, 0673, 0881 Pioneer 0552, 0598, 0658, 0659 Polk Audio 0566 Proscan 0549 Qwestar 0678 RCA 0549, 0598, 0744 Rotel 0650 SM Electronic 0757 Samsung 0600 Sanyo 0697 Sharp 0657 Sherwood 0797 Shinsonic 0560 Slim Art 0811 Sony 0560, 0891 Sylvania 0702 Tatung 0797 Teac 0598, 0744 Technics 0517 Theta Digital 0598 Thomson 0549 Toshiba 0530 Urban Concepts 0530 XBox 0549 Yamaha 0517, 0566, 0572 Zenith 0530, 0618, 0768 Zeus 0811

DIRECT BUTTON FUNCTIONS

Source button name : AMP

PAGE Command Note PAGE 1 1 AUTO SELECT AUTO SURROUND 2 3 DTS SELECT DTS MODE 4 EX/ES SELECT EX/ES 5 DIRECT SELECT PURE DIRECT PAGE 2 1 MCH-ST SELECT MULTI CHANNEL

2 STEREO SELECT STEREO MODE 3 VIRTUA SELECT VIRTUAL MODE 4 CS-II SELECT CS-II MODE 5 HT-EQ – PAGE 3 1 NIGHT NIGHT MODE ON/OFF 2 BASS + BASS + 3 BASS - BASS 4 TREB + TREBLE + 5TREB - TREBLE PAGE 4 1 MULTI MULTI ROOM ON/OFF 2 M-SPKR MULTI SPEAKER ON/OFF 3 A/D SELECT ANALOG/DIGITAL 4 V-OFF VIDEO OFF 5 AUDIO –

Source button name : TUNER

PAGE Command Note PAGE 1 1 FM SELECT FM 2 AM SELECT AM 3 XM/DAB SELECT XM RADIO 4 T-MODE SELECT MONO/STEREO 5 BAND SELECT RADIO BAND PAGE 2 1 SCAN + FREQUENCY SCAN UP 2 SCAN - FREQUENCY SCAN DOWN 3 T-MODE SELECT MONO/STEREO 4 P-SCAN SELECT PRESET SCAN 5 P-INFO SHOW PRESET INFORMATION PAGE 3 1 DISP DISPLAY European 2 PTY RDS PTY model only 3 AF RDS ALTERNATE FREQEMCY 4 STM RDS STATION MODE 5 DWR RDS DSR WAVE LANGUAGE PAGE 4 1 SCAN + FREQUENCY SCAN UP 2 SCAN - FREQUENCY SCAN DOWN 3 DISP XM/RDS DISPLAY 4 CAT + CATEGORY SEARCH UP 5 CAT - CATEGORY SEARCH DOWN

SELECT DOLBY MODE

STEREO

Source button name : DVD

PAGE Command Note PAGE 1 1 MENU SELECTS MAIN MENU 2 AUDIO SELECT LANGUAGES 3 SUB-T SELECT SUB TITLE 4 10+ DIGIT ENTRY +10 5 TRAY TRAY OPEN/CLOSE PAGE 2 1 SETUP SELECTS SETUP MENU 2 ANGLE SELECTS ANGLE 3 OSD 4 FF FAST FORWARD 5 REW REWIND PAGE 3 1 SLOW SLOW FORWARD 2 L-PLAY LAST PLAY 3 SHUFLE SHUFFLE PLAY 4 REPEAT REPEAT MODE 5 A/B REPEAT A TO B PAGE 4 1 RETURN RETURN TO MENU 2 T/C TITLE AND CHAPTER 3 3-D SURROUND ON/OFF 4 TITLE SELECTS TITLE MENU 5 ZOOM ZOOM MODE ON/OFF

Source button name : CD

PAGE Command Note PAGE 1 1 DISC + CD CHANGER NEXT DISC 2 DISC - CD CHANGER PREVIOUS DISC 3 SHUFLE SHUFFLE PLAY 4 REPEAT REPEAT 5 TRAY TRAY OPEN/CLOSE PAGE 2 1 TEXT ACTIVATE TEXT FUNCTION 2 AMS AUTO MUSIC SCAN 3 SCROLL SCROLL/RECALL 4 FF FAST FORWARD 5 REW REWIND PAGE 3 1 DISC 1 CD CHANGER DISC 1 2 DISC 2 CD CHANGER DISC 2 3 DISC 3 CD CHANGER DISC 3 4 DISC 4 CD CHANGER DISC 4 5 DISC 5 CD CHANGER DISC 5 PAGE 4 1 UNIT SELECT UNIT No. 2 TITL-S SELECT TITLE SEARCH 3 TRACK SELECT TRACK No. 4 CATGRY SELECT CATEGORY 5 P-MODE SELECT PLAY MODE

ACTIVATES ON SCREEN DISPLAY

Source button name : VCR

PAGE Command Note PAGE 1 1 TV/VCR SELECT TV/VCR 2 2XPLAY TWICE NORMAL PLAYBACK

SPEED 3 SLOW SLOW PLAYBACK SPEED 4 STILL STILL FRAME 5 EJECT EJECT PAGE 2 1 OTR ONE TOUCH RECORDING 2 AUDIO SELECT AUDIO MODE 3 SKIP 4 FF FAST FORWARD 5 REW REWIND PAGE 3 1 VIS + VHS INDEX SERCH NEXT 2 VIS 3 4 5

Source button name : CDR

PAGE Command Note PAGE 1 1 INPUT SELECT INPUT SOURCE 2 INCR INCREMENTS TRACK No. 3 SYNC-R ACTIVATE SYNCRO

4 PROG ACTIVATE PROGRAM MODE 5 TRAY TRAY OPEN/CLOSE PAGE 2 1 SCROLL SCROLL/RECALL 2 FINAL FINALIZES(WRITES TOC) 3 BLANK RECORDS BLANK 4 FF FAST FORWARD 5 REW REWIND PAGE 3 1 BLANK RECORDS BLANK 2 REPEAT ACTIVATE REPEAT MODE 3 4 5

Source button name : TAPE

PAGE Command Note PAGE 1 1 TAPE-A SELECT TAPE DECK A 2 TAPE-B SELECT TAPE DECK B 3 DIR AUTO REVERSE DIRECTION 4 TIME TIME DISPLAY 5 TRAY TRAY OPEN/CLOSE PAGE 2 1 AMS AUTO MUSIC SCAN 2 3 4 FF FAST FORWARD 5 REW REWIND

SKIP TO NEXT PROG.MARKER

VHS INDEX SERCH PREVIOUS

RECORDING

Source button name : MD

PAGE Command Note PAGE 1 1 REPEAT SELECTS REPEAT MODE 2 SHUFLE SELECTS SHUFFLE PLAY 3 DISP SELECTS DISPLAY MODE 4 EDIT SELECT EDIT MODE 5 EJECT EJECT PAGE 2 1 SP/LP SELECTS SP/LP MODE 2 DELETE SELECTS DELETE 3 ENTER SELECTS ENTER 4 FF FAST FORWARD 5 REW REWIND PAGE 3 1 MARKER SELECTS AUTO MARKER 2 PROG SELECTS PROGRAM MODE 3 SYNC-R SYNCRO REC 4 CHAR SELECTS CHARACTER MODE 5

Source button name : AUX 2

PAGE Command Note PAGE 1 1 SHUFFL SELECT AUX1 2 REPEAT SELECT AUX2 3 MODE SELECT AUX3 4 SORT SELECT NET 5 MUTE PAGE 2 1 INPUT+ INPUT SELECTOR FORWARD 2 INPUT- INPUT SELECTOR REVERSE 3 4 5

Source button name : AUX 1

PAGE Command Note PAGE 1 1 SHUFFL SELECT SHUFFLE PLAY 2 REPEAT SELECT REPEAT PLAY 3 MODE 4 SORT SORT DATA BASE 5 MUTE MUTE ON/OFF (TOGGLE) PAGE 2 1 ALBUM+ NEXT ALBUM 2 ALBUM- PREVIOUS ALBUM 3 LIST+ NEXT PLAY LIST 4 LIST- PREVIOUS PLAY LIST 5 PAGE 3 1 ARTIST SORT ORDER (ARTIST) 2 ALBUM SORT ORDER (ALBUM) 3 SONG SORT ORDER (SONG) 4 GENRE SORT ORDER (GENRE) 5 P-LIST SORT ORDER (PLAY LIST) PAGE 4 1 1 INPUT+ INPUT SELECTOR FORWARD 2 INPUT- INPUT SELECTOR REVERSE 3 4 5

CHANGE USER INTERFACE MODE

www.marantz.com

You can find your nearest authorized distributor or dealer on our website.

is a registered trademark.

Printed in China 07/2006 00M05CW851310 ecmf-d

Marantz SR7001, SR8001 user guide

Specifications and Main Features

Frequently Asked Questions

User Manual